Você está na página 1de 272

BSC6900 UMTS

V900R017C10

Site Maintenance Guide


Issue

01

Date

2015-03-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

About This Document

About This Document


Overview
This document describes how to maintain the hardware operation of the BSC6900 after the
BSC6900 commissioning. The maintenance tasks involve powering on/off the BSC6900
cabinet, replacing components, and routine maintenance tasks such as checking indicators and
monitoring the site environment.

Product Versions
The following table lists the product version and solution version related to the document.
Product Name

Product Version

Solution Version

BSC6900

V900R017C10

RAN17.1

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

Site maintenance engineers

Network planning engineers

System engineers

Field engineers

Organization
1 Change History
This section provides information about the changes in different document versions. There are
two types of changes, including function changes and editorial changes. Function changes refer
to changes in functions of a specific product version. Editorial changes refer to changes in
wording or addition of information that was not described in the earlier version.
2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

About This Document

This chapter describes the tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance. The tools must be placed
in the equipment room or nearby places for easy use.
3 Spare Part Preparations
This chapter describes the spare parts that should be prepared in the equipment rooms or a nearby
place for BSC6900 site maintenance.
4 High-Risk Hardware Operations
High-risk hardware operations include installing boards and replacing boards, both of which
have the same impact. Exercise caution when installing or replacing a board because this
operation may interrupt services or result in a system power outage. Perform this operation as
quickly as possible when traffic is light to minimize the impact on the system.
5 Routine Maintenance Items for the Hardware
This chapter describes the routine maintenance of the BSC6900 hardware. Different
maintenance items require different maintenance methods.
6 Powering On/Off the BSC6900
This section describes how to power on and off the BSC6900. It includes the distribution of the
power switches, power-on, normal power-off, and emergency power-off of the cabinet.
7 Cleaning a Fan Assembly
This chapter describes how to clean a fan assembly. To ensure its long-term operation,
maintenance engineers must clean all the fan assemblies on a regular basis, preferably once a
year.
8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter
The dust filters in the BSC6900 cabinet protect the boards and the BSC from dust and must be
cleaned on a regular basis. If a dust filter is damaged, you must replace it with a new one in time.
9 Replacing Boards and Modules
This section describes how to replace boards and modules in the BSC6900 cabinet. It also
describes how to check the replacement and how to handle the faulty boards.
10 Replacing a cable
This chapter describes how to replace the following cables: power cable, Ethernet cable, fiber
optic cable, clock signal cable, and serial cable to the alarm box, SFP+high-speed cable, trunk
cable and monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box. This section also describes how
to verify the replacement and how to handle the faulty cables.
11 Appendix
This chapter describes how to check the appearance of metal contact strips, test the connection
of assembled network cables, assemble the shielded RJ45 connector or the unshielded RJ45
connector and the network cable, and use the BSC6900site maintenance record form.
12 Indicators on Components
This chapter describes the indicators on the BSC6900 components.
13 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

About This Document

This chapter describes the DIP switches on boards and subracks of theBSC6900.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and
tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

About This Document

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt


+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means


the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

About This Document

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving


the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Change History..............................................................................................................................1
2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations..........................................................................................2
3 Spare Part Preparations................................................................................................................3
4 High-Risk Hardware Operations...............................................................................................5
5 Routine Maintenance Items for the Hardware......................................................................11
5.1 Maintenance Items for the Equipment Room...............................................................................................................12
5.2 Maintenance Items for Power Supply and Grounding System.....................................................................................13
5.3 Maintenance Items for Cabinets...................................................................................................................................14
5.4 Maintenance Items for Cables......................................................................................................................................16

6 Powering On/Off the BSC6900.................................................................................................17


6.1 Distribution of Power Switches....................................................................................................................................18
6.2 Powering On the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................................19
6.3 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation.........................................................................................................21
6.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases...........................................................................................................22

7 Cleaning a Fan Assembly...........................................................................................................23


8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter.....................................................................................25
8.1 Positions of Dust Filters...............................................................................................................................................26
8.2 Cleaning a Dust Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet Door.....................................................................................28
8.3 Cleaning a Dust Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22 Cabinet.....................................................................................29
8.4 Cleaning a Dust Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-21-N Cabinet................................................................................31
8.5 Replacing a Dust Filter.................................................................................................................................................33

9 Replacing Boards and Modules................................................................................................35


9.1 Precautions on Board Operation...................................................................................................................................39
9.2 Operations of Replacing Boards and Subracks............................................................................................................39
9.2.1 Removing a Board.....................................................................................................................................................39
9.2.2 Removing a Subrack..................................................................................................................................................42
9.2.3 Installing a Subrack...................................................................................................................................................43
9.2.4 Installing a board.......................................................................................................................................................49
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Contents

9.3 Replacing an AEUa Board...........................................................................................................................................51


9.4 Replacing an AOUa/AOUc Board...............................................................................................................................54
9.5 Replacing the ASUa Board...........................................................................................................................................58
9.6 Replacing a DPUb/DPUe Board...................................................................................................................................63
9.7 Replacing a DEUa Board.............................................................................................................................................65
9.8 Replacing an FG2a/FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................68
9.9 Replacing a GCGa/GCGb Board..................................................................................................................................72
9.10 Replacing a GCUa/GCUb Board................................................................................................................................76
9.11 Replacing a GOUc/GOUe Board...............................................................................................................................79
9.12 Replacing a GOUa Board...........................................................................................................................................83
9.13 Replacing a NIUa Board.............................................................................................................................................87
9.14 Replacing an OMU Board..........................................................................................................................................89
9.14.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU Board......................................................................................91
9.14.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU Mode...................................................................................96
9.14.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-OMU Mode...............................................................................122
9.14.4 Scenario: Replacing OMUa Boards with OMUc Boards......................................................................................138
9.14.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-OMU Mode.................................................................155
9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board...................................................................................................164
9.15 Replacing a PAMU Board........................................................................................................................................170
9.16 Replacing a PEUa/PEUc Board................................................................................................................................173
9.17 Replacing a POUa/POUc Board...............................................................................................................................176
9.18 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board................................................................................................................................181
9.19 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board.............................................................................................................................185
9.20 Replacing a UOIa/UOIc Board.................................................................................................................................189
9.21 Replacing an SPUa Board........................................................................................................................................193
9.22 Replacing an SPUb/SPUc Board..............................................................................................................................196
9.23 Replacing a Subrack.................................................................................................................................................199
9.24 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack..................................................................................................................203
9.25 Replacing the Power Distribution Box.....................................................................................................................205
9.26 Replacing a Fan Assembly.......................................................................................................................................208
9.27 Replacing a Pluggable Optical Module....................................................................................................................211
9.28 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner...................................................................................................................214

10 Replacing a cable.....................................................................................................................217
10.1 Replacing a Power Cable..........................................................................................................................................219
10.2 Replacing Cabinet PGND Cable..............................................................................................................................221
10.3 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable........................................................................................................................................223
10.4 Replacing a Fiber Optic Cable..................................................................................................................................224
10.5 Replace an Ethernet Cable........................................................................................................................................226
10.6 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................229
10.7 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable.........................................................................................................................230
10.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable..................................................................................................232
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Contents

10.9 Replacing an Alarm Box Signal Cable.....................................................................................................................233


10.10 Replacing the PDB Monitoring Signal Cable.........................................................................................................235
10.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack............................................................236
10.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable...................................................................................................................238

11 Appendix...................................................................................................................................240
11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap....................................................................................................................................241
11.2 Checking the Appearance of Metal Contact Strips...................................................................................................242
11.3 Testing the Connection of Assembled Ethernet Cables...........................................................................................244
11.4 Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and the Ethernet Cable..........................................................................247
11.5 Assembling the Unshielded RJ45 Connector and the Ethernet Cable......................................................................254
11.6 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form................................................................................................................256
11.7 Principles of Installing the Signal Cables.................................................................................................................256

12 Indicators on Components.....................................................................................................260
13 DIP Switches on Components..............................................................................................262

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

1 Change History

Change History

This section provides information about the changes in different document versions. There are
two types of changes, including function changes and editorial changes. Function changes refer
to changes in functions of a specific product version. Editorial changes refer to changes in
wording or addition of information that was not described in the earlier version.

01 (2015-03-25)
This issue does not include any changes.

Draft A (2015-01-15)
The following table lists changes compared with V900R016C00 02 (2014-05-31):
Change Type

Change Description

Function change

Added

Added the descriptions of the ASUa board. For details,


see 9.5 Replacing the ASUa Board.

Modified

Added the descriptions of the ASUa board in the


following chapters.
l 12 Indicators on Components
l 3 Spare Part Preparations
l 4 High-Risk Hardware Operations

Deleted
Editorial change

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

None.

None.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

2 Site Maintenance Tool Preparations

Site Maintenance Tool Preparations

This chapter describes the tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance. The tools must be placed
in the equipment room or nearby places for easy use.
Table 2-1 lists the maintenance items and tools for the BSC6900.
Table 2-1 Tools required for BSC6900 site maintenance
Item

Tool

Cleaning a fan
assembly and a
dust filter

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, vacuum cleaner, ESD soft brush,
and clean cotton yarn cloth

Replacing a board

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, ESD box


or bag, clean cotton yarn cloth, and fiber cleaner

Replacing a fan
assembly and a
subrack

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, ESD box


or bag, diagonal pliers, clean cotton yarn cloth, and fiber cleaner

Replacing a cable

ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, network


cable tester, RJ45 crimping tool, diagonal pliers, clean cotton yarn cloth,
fiber cleaner, tool gloves, and ESD gloves

Site maintenance tools include the ESD wrist strap, ESD box or bag, ESD gloves, tool gloves,
Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, RJ45 crimping tool, diagonal pliers, fiber cleaner,
network cable tester, clean cotton yarn cloth, vacuum cleaner, and ESD soft brush.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3 Spare Part Preparations

Spare Part Preparations

This chapter describes the spare parts that should be prepared in the equipment rooms or a nearby
place for BSC6900 site maintenance.

Principles
When preparing spare boards for the BSC6900, adhere to the following principles:
l

When a board works in stand-alone mode, services on the board are interrupted once it is
faulty. Therefore, spare boards for boards working in stand-alone mode have the high
priorities.

When a board is configured in a resource pool, services on the board will not be interrupted
even if the board is faulty. The board fault, however, deteriorates certain system
performance. Therefore, spare boards for boards in a in a resource pool have medium
priorities.

The filler panel is used for cabinet encapsulation and ventilation. It also facilitates the
electromagnetic shielding and tidiness of the cabinet. Therefore, spare filler panels have
medium priorities.

For boards working in active/standby mode, if the active board becomes faulty, services
on the active board will be automatically switched over to the standby board. Such a
switchover does not affect normal system operation. Therefore, spare boards for boards
working in active/standby mode have low priorities.

Suggestions
Table 3-1 describes the suggestions for the BSC6900 spare part preparations.
Table 3-1 Suggestions on how to prepare BSC6900 spare parts

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Spare Part

Quantity

Fan assembly

One for each site

Filler panel

Two for each site

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3 Spare Part Preparations

Spare Part

Quantity

Board

l One SCUa/SCUb, GCUa/GCGa/GCUb/GCGb, SPUa/SPUb/SPUc,


and OMUa/OMUc for each site
l One AEUa, AOUa/AOUc, ASUa, DEUa, DPUb/DPUe, GOUa/
GOUc/GOUe,POUa, UOIa/UOIc for each site if the board has been
configured.

Optical module

One for each site if an optical module has been configured

NOTE

You can also apply for a specific number of spare parts based on site configuration and according to the
spare part distribution model.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 High-Risk Hardware Operations

High-Risk Hardware Operations

High-risk hardware operations include installing boards and replacing boards, both of which
have the same impact. Exercise caution when installing or replacing a board because this
operation may interrupt services or result in a system power outage. Perform this operation as
quickly as possible when traffic is light to minimize the impact on the system.
High-Risk Operations

Impact

9.3 Replacing an AEUa


Board

l Replacing the standby AEU has no adverse impact on the


system. When no standby AEU is in position, replacing
the board interrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using
only an AEU board, replacing the AEU board interrupts
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer
equipment.

9.4 Replacing an AOUa/


AOUc Board

l Replacing the standby AOU has no adverse impact on the


system. If no standby AOU is in position, replacing the
board interrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using
only an AOU board, replacing the AOU board interrupts
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer
equipment.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

9.5 Replacing the ASUa


Board

Replacing the ASU board interrupts all the services carried on


the board.

9.6 Replacing a DPUb/


DPUe Board

Replacing the DPU board interrupts all the services carried on


the board.

9.7 Replacing a DEUa


Board

Replacing the DEUa board takes the BSC an extended period


to perform seamless crystal voice processing on AMR voice
packets. This yields less significant voice quality
improvements but does not negatively affect voice services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 High-Risk Hardware Operations

High-Risk Operations

Impact

9.8 Replacing an FG2a/


FG2c Board

l If the FG2 board is standby and the data over the port on
the FG2 board are backed up, replacing the standby FG2
board has no adverse impact on the system.
l When the FG2 boards work in backup mode and the ports
work in load sharing mode, replacing the standby FG2
board interrupts part of services if the traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board.
When the FG2 boards work in backup mode with
independent ports, replacing the standby FG2 board
interrupts all the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing an FG2 board working in stand-alone mode
interrupts all the services on the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using
only an FG2 board, replacing the FG2 board interrupts
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer
equipment.

9.11 Replacing a GOUc/


GOUe Board
9.12 Replacing a GOUa
Board

l If the GOU board is standby and the data over the port on
the GOU board are backed up, replacing the standby GOU
board has no adverse impact on the system.
l When the GOU boards work in backup mode and the ports
work in load sharing mode, replacing the standby GOU
board interrupts part of services if the total traffic over the
ports exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active
board. When the GOU boards work in backup mode with
independent ports, replacing the standby GOU board
interrupts all the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOU board working in stand-alone mode
interrupts the services on that board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using
only a GOU board, replacing the GOU board interrupts
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer
equipment.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

9.13 Replacing a NIUa


Board

Replacing the NIU board interrupts all the services carried on


the board.

9.14 Replacing an OMU


Board

Replacing the OMU board interrupts all the services carried


on the board.

9.15 Replacing a PAMU


Board

Replacing the PAMU board interrupts the monitoring on the


BSC6900 PDB.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 High-Risk Hardware Operations

High-Risk Operations

Impact

9.16 Replacing a PEUa/


PEUc Board

l Replacing the standby PEU has no adverse impact on the


system. Replacing the PEU board working in stand-alone
mode, however, interrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using
only a PEU board, replacing the PEU board interrupts
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer
equipment.

9.17 Replacing a POUa/


POUc Board

l Replacing the standby POU has no adverse impact on the


system. Replacing the POU board working in stand-alone
mode, however, interrupts services carried by the subrack
that houses the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using
only a POU board, replacing the POU board interrupts
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer
equipment.

9.18 Replace an SAUa/


SAUc Board

Replacing the SAU board working in stand-alone mode will


interrupt the communication between the host boards and the
SAU, which results in system data loss.

9.19 Replacing an SCUa/


SCUb Board

l Replacing the standby SCU board decreases the internal


switching capacity but has no impact on services.
l If no standby board is detected, replacing the SCU board
in the MPS resets all boards in the BSC6900 and interrupts
all ongoing services in the BSC6900.
l If no standby board is detected, replacing the SCU board
in the EPS resets all boards in the subrack and interrupts
all ongoing services. In addition, the communication
between the EPS and the MPS is interrupted.

9.20 Replacing a UOIa/


UOIc Board
9.21 Replacing an SPUa
Board

l Replacing the standby UOI board has no adverse impact


on the system. When no standby UOI board is in position,
replacing the board interrupts services carried on this
board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using
only a UOI board, replacing the UOI board interrupts
ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer
equipment.

9.22 Replacing an SPUb/


SPUc Board

l Replacing the standby main control SPU board has no


adverse impact on the services in the system. Replacing
the main control SPU board working in stand-alone mode,
however, interrupts services carried on the subrack.
l Replacing the standby non main control SPU board has no
adverse impact on the services in the system. Replacing
the non main control SPU board working in stand-alone
mode, however, interrupts services carried on the board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 High-Risk Hardware Operations

High-Risk Operations

Impact

9.23 Replacing a Subrack

l Replacing a subrack interrupts services carried on the


boards in the subrack.
l Replace a subrack with caution quickly when traffic is
light, for example, in the early morning.
l A subrack is fairly heavy. For safety purposes, a 3-person
group is recommended when replacing the subrack.

9.24 Replacing the


Independent Fan Subrack

Moving the mounting bar and guide rail may scuff the PGND
cables and monitoring signal cables during the component
replacement. Exercise caution when performing this
operation.

9.25 Replacing the Power


Distribution Box

l Replacing the power distribution box in the EPR/TCR


interrupts all the services carried by the EPR/TCR.
l Replacing the power distribution box in the MPR
interrupts all the services carried by the entire BSC6900.

9.26 Replacing a Fan


Assembly

Replacing the fan assembly severely affects the heat


dissipation. You are advised to replace the fan assembly
within one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged due
to high temperature.

9.27 Replacing a Pluggable


Optical Module

l Replacing the pluggable optical module on the standby


optical interface board does not affect the system.
l If there is no standby board in position, replacing the
pluggable optical module on the active optical interface
board interrupts all the services carried on the board.

9.28 Replacing an Optical


Splitter/Combiner

l When replacing the optical splitter/combiner, do not look


into the optical port without eye protection.
l Replacing an optical splitter/combiner interrupts ongoing
services on the corresponding interface boards. Therefore,
replace it during low-traffic hours, for example, at
midnight.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 High-Risk Hardware Operations

High-Risk Operations

Impact

10.1 Replacing a Power


Cable

l During the replacement of the power cable between the


PDF and the power distribution box, if single-input
external power is supplied, the replacement causes the
system to power off and interrupts ongoing services. If
dual-input external power is supplied, the replacement
does not affect the system but triggers a power failure
alarm.
l During the replacement of the power cable between the
power distribution box and the subrack, if single-input
power is supplied, the replacement causes the subrack to
power off and interrupts ongoing services carried on the
boards in the subrack. If dual-input power is supplied, the
replacement does not affect the system.
l During the replacement of the power cable between the
power distribution box and the independent fan subrack,
if single-input power is supplied, the replacement causes
the subrack to power off and affects the system heat
dissipation. If dual-input power is supplied, the
replacement does not affect the system.
l Before replacing a power cable, check the power supply
mode (for example, single input or dual input) of the power
cable and notify of the customers. For single-input power
supply, be prepared for possible service interruption.

10.3 Replacing an E1/T1


Cable

l Replacing the E1/T1 cable interrupts the services carried


over the E1/T1 cable.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer end are connected using only
the E1/T1 cable, all the services between the BSC6900 and
its peer end are interrupted during the replacement.

10.4 Replacing a Fiber


Optic Cable

l Do not look directly at connectors of the fiber optic cables


when replacing the fiber optic cable. The beam may hurt
your eyes.
l When the BSC6900 and other NEs are connected in optical
port backup mode, replacing one fiber optic cable does not
affect system services. However, the replacement
interrupts all the services carried on this cable in other
connection mode.
l When the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected
using only the fiber optic cable, replacing this cable
interrupts all the services between the BSC6900 and its
peer NEs.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4 High-Risk Hardware Operations

High-Risk Operations

Impact

10.5 Replace an Ethernet


Cable

l Replacing the Ethernet cable connected to the LMT


interrupts the communication between the LMT and the
OMU.
l The Port Trunking function is used in the interconnection
ports on the inter-subrack SCU board. Replacing one
Ethernet cable does not affect the system.
l For the interface board, if the BSC6900 is connected to the
peer equipment only through the Ethernet cable, replacing
this cable interrupts all the services between the
BSC6900 and its peer NEs.
l The OMU board is equipped with a pair of Ethernet cables
for backup. Replacing one of them does not affect the
system.

10.7 Replacing a Y-Shaped


Clock Cable

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Replacing a Y-shaped clock cable may cause a clock-related


alarm and an automatic switchover between the active and
standby SCU boards.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

5 Routine Maintenance Items for the Hardware

Routine Maintenance Items for the


Hardware

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the routine maintenance of the BSC6900 hardware. Different
maintenance items require different maintenance methods.
5.1 Maintenance Items for the Equipment Room
This section describes the maintenance items in the BSC6900 equipment room. The items
include the environmental alarm, anti-theft device, door and window, temperature, humidity,
indoor air conditioner, and dustproof condition.
5.2 Maintenance Items for Power Supply and Grounding System
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 power supply and the grounding
system. The maintenance items include power cables, voltage, protection ground (PGND)
cables, components inside the cabinet, ground resistance, batteries, and rectifiers.
5.3 Maintenance Items for Cabinets
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet. The maintenance items
include fans, dust filters, cabinet surface, locks and doors of cabinet, cabinet cleanness, fan
assembly cleanness, ESD wrist strap, cabinet components, and idle optical ports on boards.
5.4 Maintenance Items for Cables
This section describes the cable maintenance items of the BSC6900. The maintenance items
include cable labels, connectors and sockets, connection of E1/T1 cables, connection of Ethernet
cables, and connection of fiber optic cables.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

5 Routine Maintenance Items for the Hardware

5.1 Maintenance Items for the Equipment Room


This section describes the maintenance items in the BSC6900 equipment room. The items
include the environmental alarm, anti-theft device, door and window, temperature, humidity,
indoor air conditioner, and dustproof condition.
Table 5-1 lists the maintenance items in the equipment room.
Table 5-1 Maintenance items in the equipment room

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Item

Checking
Frequency

Procedure

Reference
Standard

Room environment

Daily

Check whether power


supply alarms, fire
alarms, and smoke
and dust alarms are
reported.

No power supply
alarm, fire alarm, or
smoke alarm is
reported.

Anti-theft device,
door, and window

Weekly

Check the anti-theft


device, door, and
window.

The anti-theft device,


door, and window are
in good condition.

Room temperature

Daily

Check the
thermometer in the
equipment room.

The temperature is
between 15C and 30
C.

Room humidity

Daily

Check the hygrometer


in the equipment
room.

The humidity is
between 40% and
65%.

Indoor air
conditioner

Weekly

Check the running


status of the air
conditioner.

The air conditioner


works properly. The
temperature set on the
air conditioner is
consistent with that
on the thermometer.

Dustproof condition

Weekly

Check the cleanness


of the equipment
shell, equipment
interior, floor, and
desktop.

Neat and clean, clear


of obvious dust.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

5 Routine Maintenance Items for the Hardware

5.2 Maintenance Items for Power Supply and Grounding


System
This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 power supply and the grounding
system. The maintenance items include power cables, voltage, protection ground (PGND)
cables, components inside the cabinet, ground resistance, batteries, and rectifiers.
Table 5-2 lists the maintenance items of the power supply and the grounding system.
Table 5-2 Maintenance items of the power supply and the grounding system
Item

Checking
Frequency

Procedure

Reference Standard

Power Cables

Monthly or
quarterly

Check all the power cables


between the power supply
system and power
distribution box of the
cabinet.

l The power cables are not


aging.
l The ground cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.

Voltage

Monthly or
quarterly

Measure the voltage of the


power supply by using a
multimeter.

The normal voltage ranges


from -57 V DC to -40 V DC.

Ground cables

Monthly or
quarterly

Check all ground cables


and ground bars.

l The ground cables are not


aging.
l The ground cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.
l The ground bars are not
corroded. Proper anticorrosion measures are
applied.

Components
inside the
cabinet

Monthly or
quarterly

Check the connection


terminals and captive
screws of all the ground
cables.

l The ground cables are not


aging.
l The ground cables are
securely connected. The
connection points are not
corroded.
l The connection terminals
and captive screws are
securely and reliably
connected, and they are
not corroded.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

5 Routine Maintenance Items for the Hardware

Item

Checking
Frequency

Procedure

Reference Standard

ground
resistance

Monthly or
quarterly

Measure the ground


resistance with an electric
ground resistance tester
and keep a record.

The ground resistance is less


than or equal to 10 ohms.

Battery and
rectifier

Yearly

Check the batteries and


rectifiers of the power
supply system in
equipment room.

l The batteries are normal.


There is no battery
leakage, swelling, or
corrosion.
l The capacity of the battery
meets the requirements
and the connection of the
battery is correct.
l The specifications of the
rectifier meet the
requirements.

5.3 Maintenance Items for Cabinets


This section describes the maintenance items of the BSC6900 cabinet. The maintenance items
include fans, dust filters, cabinet surface, locks and doors of cabinet, cabinet cleanness, fan
assembly cleanness, ESD wrist strap, cabinet components, and idle optical ports on boards.
Table 5-3 lists the maintenance items of the BSC cabinet.
Table 5-3 Maintenance items of the cabinet
Item

Fans in each
subrack

Dust filters of
each cabinet

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Checking
Frequency

Weekly or
monthly

Quarterly

Procedure

Reference Standard

Check the fans in each


subrack.

The fans work properly


without any abnormal
sounds such as a sound of
the blades scraping against
the fan assembly.

Check the dust filters of


each cabinet.

The dust filters are not


dusty or damaged. Clean
the dirty dust filter by
referring to 8 Cleaning
and Replacing a Dust
Filter. Replace the
damaged dust filter
according to 8.5 Replacing
a Dust Filter.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

5 Routine Maintenance Items for the Hardware

Item

Checking
Frequency

Procedure

Reference Standard

Cabinet surface

Monthly or
quarterly

Check whether the cabinet


surface is intact and
whether the cables on the
cabinet are legible.

The cabinet surface is


intact and the labels are
legible.

Check locks
and doors on
the cabinet

Monthly or
quarterly

Check whether the lock of


the cabinet works properly
and whether the door can
be opened and closed
without obstructions.

The locks and the doors on


the cabinet work properly.

Check cabinet
cleanness

Monthly or
quarterly

Check whether the cabinet


is clean.

The cabinet surface is


clean. The interior of the
cabinet is not dusty.

Yearly

For details on how to clean


the fan assembly, see 7
Cleaning a Fan
Assembly.

No dust or damage on the


surface of or inside each
fan assembly.

Check the indicators of


every component inside
the cabinet.

The indicators show that


every component is in good
condition. For details about
the descriptions of the
indicators, see Fan
Assembly (Configured
with the PFCU Board), and
Indicators on Components.

Check fan
assembly
cleanness

Inside of the
cabinet

Monthly or
quarterly

Measure the grounding


resistance of the ESD wrist
strap in either of the
following ways:
ESD wrist strap

Quarterly

l Use an ESD wrist strap


tester to test the ESD
wrist strap.
l Use a multimeter to test
the ground resistance
of the ESD wrist strap.

Protection of
the idle optical
ports on boards

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Monthly or
quarterly

Check dust-proof caps on


the idle optical ports.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l When you use an ESD


wrist strap tester, the
GOOD indicator on it is
ON.
l If you are using a
multimeter, the ground
resistance is between
0.8 megohm and 1.2
megohms.
The idle optical ports are
covered with dust-proof
caps.

15

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

5 Routine Maintenance Items for the Hardware

5.4 Maintenance Items for Cables


This section describes the cable maintenance items of the BSC6900. The maintenance items
include cable labels, connectors and sockets, connection of E1/T1 cables, connection of Ethernet
cables, and connection of fiber optic cables.
Table 5-4 lists the maintenance items of the cables.
Table 5-4 Maintenance items of cables
Item

Connectors and
sockets

Checking
Frequency

Procedure

Reference Standard

Monthly or
quarterly

Check whether there is


dust or oil on the
insulator surface of
every connector or
socket.

The insulators of the


connector or of the socket
are clean.
l The E1/T1 cables are
properly connected.

Connection of
E1/T1 cables

Yearly

Check the connections


of the E1/T1 cables.

l The E1/T1 cables are


intact.
l The cable labels are
legible.
l The Ethernet cables are
properly connected.

Connection of
Ethernet cables

Yearly

Check the connections


of the Ethernet cables.

l The Ethernet cables are


intact.
l The cable labels are
legible.
l The fiber optic cables
are properly connected.

Connection of
fiber optic
cables

Yearly

Check the connections


of the optical fiber.

l The fiber optic cables


are intact.
l The idle optical
connectors are covered
with dust-proof caps.
l The cable labels are
legible.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

Powering On/Off the BSC6900

About This Chapter


This section describes how to power on and off the BSC6900. It includes the distribution of the
power switches, power-on, normal power-off, and emergency power-off of the cabinet.
6.1 Distribution of Power Switches
The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR provides 20 (10 x 2) routes of power outputs. This
section describes the mapping between the eight routes of power outputs from the power
distribution box of the MPR/EPR and the components in the cabinet.
6.2 Powering On the Cabinet
This section describes how to power on the BSC6900 cabinet and how to handle common power
failures in the components of the cabinet.
6.3 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation
This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation. You must
power off the BSC6900 cabinet when relocating the equipment or before a forecast territorial
power blackout. Powering off the BSC6900 cabinet interrupts all ongoing services. Therefore,
you should power off the BSC6900 only when required.
6.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases
This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in emergency cases. To ensure
the security of the BSC6900 cabinet, the BSC6900 cabinet must be powered off in emergency
cases, such as fire, smoke, or water immersion.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

6.1 Distribution of Power Switches


The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR provides 20 (10 x 2) routes of power outputs. This
section describes the mapping between the eight routes of power outputs from the power
distribution box of the MPR/EPR and the components in the cabinet.
The power distribution box of the MPR/EPR provides eight routes of power outputs in two
groups (group A and group B), which are controlled by switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10
respectively. Figure 6-1 shows the mapping between the power switches on the power
distribution box and the components in the MPR/EPR/TCR. Table 6-1 lists the mapping between
the power switches and the components.
Figure 6-1 Distribution of power switches on the power distribution box of the MPR/EPR

Table 6-1 Mapping between the power switches and the components in the MPR/EPR

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Component

Power Switch on the Power Distribution Box

Subrack 2

A8, B8

Subrack 1

A9, B9

Subrack 0

A10, B10

Independent fan subrack

A7, B7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Powering On/Off the BSC6900


NOTE

The independent fan subrack is configured in only the N68E-22 cabinet (controlled by power switches A7 and
B7).

6.2 Powering On the Cabinet


This section describes how to power on the BSC6900 cabinet and how to handle common power
failures in the components of the cabinet.

Prerequisites
l

The surface of the input power cables is not damaged. The input power cables are correctly
and securely connected.

The green and yellow PGND cable for the cabinet is properly connected.

The switches on the power distribution box are set to OFF.

NOTICE
Ensure that the Checking and Setting DIP Switches on Subracks operation is performed before
the cabinet is powered on. After the cabinet is powered on, any modification to the setting of a
DIP switch on a subrack does not take effect.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the switch that controls the BSC6900 power supply on the PDF to ON.
Step 2 When the RUN indicator on the front panel of the power distribution box blinks every other
0.25s, set the switches on the power distribution box to ON according to the actual requirements.
Step 3 Check the power supply to the cabinet components, as listed in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Checklist for the power supply to the cabinet components
Component

Normal indicator Status

Board

The green RUN indicator on the board panel first blinks


0.125s on and 0.125s off. After the board is loaded, the
indicator blinks one second on and one second off.

Fan box

The green RUN indicator on the panel of the fan box


first blinks 0.125s on and 0.125s off, and then the
indicator blinks one second on and one second off after
the subrack/independent fan subrack is powered on.

Power distribution monitor board

The green RUN indicator on the board panel first blinks


0.25s on and 0.25s off. After the board is loaded, the
indicator blinks one second on and one second off.

Step 4 Power on the cabinet and then check the power supply to the components in the cabinet. Clear
the power failures, if any, according to Table 6-3.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

Table 6-3 Handling power failures in the components in the cabinet


Failure Type

Handling Measures

Power failure in all the internal


parts of the cabinet

Check whether the -48 V power cables and the RTN power
cables (DC Return) are properly connected.
l If the cable connection is wrong, set all the power
switches on the power distribution box to OFF, and then
reconnect the power cables.
NOTICE
Set the switches on the PDF to OFF before reconnecting the
power cables.

l If the cable connection is correct, replace the PAMU


board (overvoltage protection board for the power
distribution box). If the failure persists, replace the
power distribution box.
Power failure in all the boards
in a subrack

Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the


subrack.
l If the input voltage is between -57 V and -40 V, replace
the subrack.
l If the input voltage is not between -57 V and -40 V, check
the connections of the power cables. If the connections
of the power cables are loose, set the switch on the power
distribution box corresponding to the subrack to OFF
and then reconnect the power cables. Otherwise, replace
the power distribution box because the switches on it
may be faulty.

Power failure in a certain board


in a subrack

Perform the following operations:


1. Check whether the board is securely connected. If the
board is not securely connected, reinstall the board and
observe the board indicator. For the status of the
indicators, refer to Indicators on Components.
2. Remove the board and check whether the pins in the
backplane socket of the slot are distorted, broken, or
missing. If the socket is damaged, replace the faulty
subrack.
3. Reinsert the board into the slot and observe the board
indicator. For the status of the indicators, refer to
Indicators on Components.
4. If the indicator does not function properly, remove the
board and insert it into a vacant slot that houses the same
type of board. Then, observe the indicator.
l If the board functions properlythe slot is faulty.
Replace the subrack.
l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. Replace the
board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Powering On/Off the BSC6900

Failure Type

Handling Measures

Power failure in any other part


of the cabinet

Use a multimeter to measure the input voltage of the faulty


component.
l If the input voltage is between -57 V and -40 V, replace
the component.
l If the input voltage is not between -57 V and -40 V, check
the connections of power cables. If the connections of
the power cables are loose, set the switch on the power
distribution box corresponding to the component to OFF
and then reconnect the power cables. Otherwise, replace
the power distribution box because the switch on it may
be faulty.

----End

6.3 Powering Off the Cabinet in a Normal Situation


This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in a normal situation. You must
power off the BSC6900 cabinet when relocating the equipment or before a forecast territorial
power blackout. Powering off the BSC6900 cabinet interrupts all ongoing services. Therefore,
you should power off the BSC6900 only when required.

Prerequisites
l

The green and yellow PGND cable for the cabinet is properly connected.

Backing Up and Restoring the GBSS&RAN System Data is complete on the BSC6900.

Context
To minimize the adverse impact on the BSC6900, power off the EPR before you power off the
MPR.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the power switches corresponding to the subracks configured in the EPR. Set the power
switches A7 to A10 and B7 to B10, SW1 to SW6 on the power distribution box to OFF in
sequence.
Step 2 Power off the OMU board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

If...

Then...

The OMUa board is configured

Raise the ejector levers of the OMU board.

If OMUc board is configured

Press the PWRBTN button on the OMUc


board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

6 Powering On/Off the BSC6900


NOTE

Repeat this step if two OMUa boards are configured in the subrack. When you flip raise the ejector levers,
the board automatically powers off the operating system and hard disks. Then, the OFFLINE indicator on
the board is ON, which indicates that the board is powered off.

Step 3 After the OFFLINE indicator on the OMU board is ON, set the power switches A7 to A10 and
B7 to B10, SW1 to SW6 on the power distribution box to OFF in sequence.
Step 4 Lower the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position.
Step 5 Set the switches that control the power supply on the PDF to OFF.
----End

6.4 Powering Off the Cabinet in Emergency Cases


This section describes how to power off the BSC6900 cabinet in emergency cases. To ensure
the security of the BSC6900 cabinet, the BSC6900 cabinet must be powered off in emergency
cases, such as fire, smoke, or water immersion.

Procedure
Step 1 Set all the switches on the power distribution box of the BSC6900 cabinet to OFF.
Step 2 If time permits, set the switches that control the power supply to the BSC6900 on the PDF to
OFF.
----End

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Cleaning a Fan Assembly

Cleaning a Fan Assembly

This chapter describes how to clean a fan assembly. To ensure its long-term operation,
maintenance engineers must clean all the fan assemblies on a regular basis, preferably once a
year.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a piece of clean cotton yarn cloth,
an ESD soft brush, a vacuum cleaner, and a Phillips screwdriver.

A cleaned spare fan assembly is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Replacing a fan assembly during the cleaning severely affects heat dissipation. The time during
which there is no fan assembly in the lower part of the subrack must be as short as possible,
preferably less than one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged due to high temperature.

Procedure
Step 1 Use the clean cotton yarn cloth, ESD soft brush, and vacuum cleaner to clean the spare fan
assembly.
Step 2 Open the front door of the cabinet and loosen the two captive screws on the fan assembly with
a Phillips screwdriver.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

7 Cleaning a Fan Assembly

Step 3 Pull the fan assembly out from the cabinet.

DANGER
Do not put your fingers into the fan assembly. The running fan or metal edges in the fan assembly
will injure your fingers.
Step 4 Install the spare fan assembly into the cabinet and then fasten the captive screws to secure the
fan assembly.
Step 5 Use the clean cotton yarn cloth, ESD soft brush, and vacuum cleaner to clean the removed fan
assembly for future use.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to replace other fan assemblies.
----End

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

About This Chapter


The dust filters in the BSC6900 cabinet protect the boards and the BSC from dust and must be
cleaned on a regular basis. If a dust filter is damaged, you must replace it with a new one in time.
8.1 Positions of Dust Filters
dust filters are installed on the inner side of the front and rear doors, and at the bottom of the
BSC6900 cabinet. The installation positions of the dust filters are different in the N68E-22
cabinet and in the N68E-21-N cabinet.
8.2 Cleaning a Dust Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet Door
This section describes how to clean the dust filters on the inner side of the BSC6900 cabinet
door. Maintenance engineers must clean the dust filters on a regular basis, preferably once every
quarter.
8.3 Cleaning a Dust Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22 Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the dust filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet.
Maintenance engineers must clean the dust filter at the bottom of each cabinet on a regular basis,
preferably once every quarter.
8.4 Cleaning a Dust Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-21-N Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the dust filter at the N68E-21-N cabinet bottom. Maintenance
engineers must clean the dust filter at the bottom of each cabinet on a regular basis, preferably
once every quarter.
8.5 Replacing a Dust Filter
This section describes how to replace a worn-out BSC6900 dust filter with a new BSC6900 dust
filter. It takes about five minutes to remove a dust filter and install a new one.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

8.1 Positions of Dust Filters


dust filters are installed on the inner side of the front and rear doors, and at the bottom of the
BSC6900 cabinet. The installation positions of the dust filters are different in the N68E-22
cabinet and in the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Dust Filters in the N68E-22 Cabinet


Figure 8-1 shows the positions of the dust filters in the single-door N68E-22 cabinet. Figure
8-2 shows the positions of the dust filters in the double-door N68E-22 cabinet.
Figure 8-1 Dust filters in the single-door N68E-22 cabinet

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

Figure 8-2 Dust filters in the double-door N68E-22 cabinet

Dust Filters Installed in the N68E-21-N Cabinet


Figure 8-3 shows the dust filters in the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

Figure 8-3 Dust filters installed in the N68E-21-N cabinet

8.2 Cleaning a Dust Filter on the Inner Side of the Cabinet


Door
This section describes how to clean the dust filters on the inner side of the BSC6900 cabinet
door. Maintenance engineers must clean the dust filters on a regular basis, preferably once every
quarter.

Prerequisites
Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a piece of clean and dry cotton yarn
cloth, and a vacuum cleaner.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the cabinet door and strip off the black dust filter from the inside of the door.
Step 2 Clean the inside metal surface of the cabinet door with the clean and dry cotton yarn cloth, and
the dust filter with the vacuum cleaner.

NOTICE
Do not use water to clean the dust filter. The water has the risk of damaging the dust filter.
You can use the vacuum cleaner to clean it.
Step 3 Stick the clean dust filter along the edges of the inside of the door.

NOTICE
Attach the dust filter tightly to the binding strips to prevent it from falling. Use new binding
strips if the old ones cannot work.
----End

8.3 Cleaning a Dust Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-22


Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the dust filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet.
Maintenance engineers must clean the dust filter at the bottom of each cabinet on a regular basis,
preferably once every quarter.

Prerequisites
Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a wrench, a Phillips screwdriver, a piece
of clean and dry cotton yarn cloth, and a vacuum cleaner.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cables from the air defense frame, and use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four
nuts on the air defense frame. Then pull out the air defense frame.
Step 2 Open the front door of the N68E-22 cabinet and then remove the four nuts from the dust filter
with a wrench, as shown in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 Removing the dust filter from the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet

Step 3 Hold the panel of the dust filter frame with both hands and lift the frame slightly to raise the
panel higher than the screws fixing the ground cables at the bottom of the cabinet. Then, pull
the frame out of the cabinet slowly and completely.
Step 4 Clean the dust filter with the cotton yarn cloth and vacuum cleaner.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

NOTICE
Do not use water to clean the dust filter. The water has the risk of damaging the dust filter.
You can use the vacuum cleaner to clean it.
Step 5 Insert the clean dust filter carefully along the guide rails into the cabinet. Do not push it.
Step 6 After the dust filter is in place, fix the four nuts on the dust filter frame with a wrench, as shown
in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 Installing the dust filter at the bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet

----End

8.4 Cleaning a Dust Filter at the Bottom of the N68E-21-N


Cabinet
This section describes how to clean the dust filter at the N68E-21-N cabinet bottom. Maintenance
engineers must clean the dust filter at the bottom of each cabinet on a regular basis, preferably
once every quarter.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

Prerequisites
Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a piece of dry
cotton yarn cloth, and a vacuum cleaner.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front door of the N68E-21-N cabinet. Then, remove the two screws from the dust filter
with a Phillips screwdriver, as shown in Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-6 Removing the dust filter from the N68E-21-N cabinet bottom

Step 2 Hold the handle on the frame of the dust filter and vertically lift the dust filter slowly until it is
removed from the cabinet.
Step 3 Clean the dust filter with the cotton yarn cloth and vacuum cleaner.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

NOTICE
Do not use water to clean the dust filter. The water has the risk of damaging the dust filter.
You can use the vacuum cleaner to clean it.
Step 4 Insert with care the dry and clean dust filter along the guide rails into the cabinet, as shown in
Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Installing the dust filter at the N68E-21-N cabinet bottom

Step 5 After the dust filter is in position, fasten the two screws on the dust filter frame with the Phillips
screwdriver.
----End

8.5 Replacing a Dust Filter


This section describes how to replace a worn-out BSC6900 dust filter with a new BSC6900 dust
filter. It takes about five minutes to remove a dust filter and install a new one.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap and a Phillips screwdriver.

The spare BSC6900 dust filters are ready.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

8 Cleaning and Replacing a Dust Filter

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dust filter in the cabinet.
If...

Then...

The dust filter is installed at the bottom of Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two
the cabinet
captive screws. Then remove the dust filter.
The dust filter is installed at the inner side Remove the dust filter directly.
of the front or rear door
Step 2 Install a new dust filter.
If...

Then...

The dust filter needs to be installed at the Install the dust filter to its original place. Then
bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet
use the Phillips screwdriver to fasten the
screws.
The dust filter needs to be installed at the Insert the dust filter along the guide rails and
bottom of the N68E-21-N cabinet
tighten the screws with the Phillips screwdriver.
The dust filter is installed at the inner side Attach the black dust filter onto the inner side
of the front or rear door
of the front or rear door. The dust filter must be
tightly attached to the black binding strips to
prevent the dust filter from falling.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced dust filters to prevent environmental pollution.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Replacing Boards and Modules

About This Chapter


This section describes how to replace boards and modules in the BSC6900 cabinet. It also
describes how to check the replacement and how to handle the faulty boards.

Context
Based on the board hardware versions before and after the replacement, the replacement
operations can be divided into the following two types:
l

Replacing a board with a board of the same hardware version, for example, replacing an
FG2a board with an FG2a board.

Replacing a board with a board of a later hardware version, for example, replacing an FG2a
board with an FG2c board.
NOTE

l Replace a faulty board with a board of the same type.


l If both Huawei and the customer do not have such type of spare boards, replace both the faulty board
and its standby or active board with boards of another type.
For example, two GCUa boards working in active/standby mode have been installed for the
BSC6900. If either of them is faulty, replace the two boards with two GCUa boards.

For details on how to replace a board with a board of the same hardware version, see the
description in this section.
For details on how to replace one board with a board of a later hardware version, contact Huawei
engineers.
The second type of replacement operations involves capacity expansion design and board type
combination. You are advised to contact Huawei engineers to replace a board with a board of a
later hardware version.
9.1 Precautions on Board Operation
This section describes the precautions you must take when installing, removing, or replacing the
boards, or performing any other operations in which you should touch the boards.
9.2 Operations of Replacing Boards and Subracks
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

This section describes how to replace a BSC6900 board. The replacement operations include
removing a board, removing a subrack, installing a board and installing a subrack.
9.3 Replacing an AEUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AEUa board. The AEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace the board.
9.4 Replacing an AOUa/AOUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUa/AOUc board. The AOUa/AOUc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
9.5 Replacing the ASUa Board
This section describes how to replace the ASUa board when it becomes faulty. The ASUa board
supports hot swap. It takes about 15 minutes to remove the ASUa and load a new one.
9.6 Replacing a DPUb/DPUe Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty DPUb/DPUe board. The DPUb/DPUe board is
hot-swappable. It takes about 2 minutes from the time the original board is removed to the time
software is successfully loaded on the new board.
9.7 Replacing a DEUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty DEUa board. The DEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about 4 minutes from the time the original board is removed to the time software is
successfully loaded on the new board.
9.8 Replacing an FG2a/FG2c Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2a/FG2c board. The FG2a/FG2c board is hot
swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
9.9 Replacing a GCGa/GCGb Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GCGa/GCGb board. The replacement scenarios
include: replacing a GCGa board with another GCGa, replacing a GCGb board with another
GCGb board, replacing a GCGb board with a GCGa board, replacing a GCGa board with a
GCGb board. The GCGa/GCGb aboard is hot-swappable. It takes about 5 minutes from the time
cables on the board are disconnected to the time software is successfully loaded on the new
board.
9.10 Replacing a GCUa/GCUb Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GCUa/GCUb board. The replacement scenarios
include: replacing a GCUa board with another GCUa board, replacing a GCUb with another
GCUb board, replacing a GCUb board with a GCUa board, and replacing a GCUa with a GCUb
board. The GCUa/GCUb aboard is hot-swappable. It takes about 5 minutes from disconnecting
the cables from the board to loading software successfully.
9.11 Replacing a GOUc/GOUe Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUc/GOUe board. The GOUc/GOUe board is
hot-swappable. The replacement scenarios include: replacing a GOUc board with another
GOUc, replacing a GOUe board with another GOUe board, replacing a GOUe board with a
GOUc board, replacing a GOUc board with a GOUe board. It takes about 5 minutes from the
time that cables on the original board are removed to the time software is successfully loaded
on the new board.
9.12 Replacing a GOUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUa board. The GOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.13 Replacing a NIUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty NIUa board. The NIUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about two minutes to replace the board.
9.14 Replacing an OMU Board
This section describes how to replace an OMU board. A faulty OMU board needs to be replaced
to prevent data from being lost when OMU operation and maintenance are interrupted due to
disconnection between the OMU and host boards. For details about how to replace an OMU
board for other purposes, also see this section.
9.15 Replacing a PAMU Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty PAMU board. The PAMU board is hot-swappable.
It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.
9.16 Replacing a PEUa/PEUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty PEUa/PEUc board. The PEUa/PEUc board is hotswappable. It takes about eight minutes to replace a PEUa/PEUc board.
9.17 Replacing a POUa/POUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty POUa/POUc board. The POUa/POUc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
9.18 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SAUa/SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about 16 minutes to replace the SAUa/SAUc board.
9.19 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board
When an SCUa/SCUb board is faulty, you must replace it. The SCUa/SCUb board is hotswappable. The replacement scenarios include: replacing a SCUa board with another SCUa,
replacing a SCUa board with a SCUb board. It takes about 4 minutes to replace the board.
9.20 Replacing a UOIa/UOIc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIa/UOIc board. The UOIa/UOIc board is hot
swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.
9.21 Replacing an SPUa Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SPUa board. The SPUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.
9.22 Replacing an SPUb/SPUc Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SPUb/SPUc board. The SPUb/SPUcc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.
9.23 Replacing a Subrack
This section describes how to replace a faulty BSC6900 subrack. After powering off a subrack,
60 minutes is required for the replacement before a new subrack starts working properly.
9.24 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack
When an independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 is faulty, the independent fan subrack must
be replaced. It takes about 15 minutes to replace an independent fan subrack.
9.25 Replacing the Power Distribution Box
This section describes how to replace a faulty power distribution box. It takes about 25 minutes
to replace a power distribution box.
9.26 Replacing a Fan Assembly
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

This section describes how to replace a faulty fan assembly. You are advised to replace the fan
assembly within one minute.
9.27 Replacing a Pluggable Optical Module
This section describes how to replace a faulty pluggable optical module.
9.28 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner
This section describes how to replace an optical splitter/combiner. The BSC6900 optical
splitters/combiners are LC/LC-LC single-mode optical splitter/combiner and LC/LC-LC
multimode optical splitter/combiner. It takes about five minutes to replace an optical splitter/
combiner.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.1 Precautions on Board Operation


This section describes the precautions you must take when installing, removing, or replacing the
boards, or performing any other operations in which you should touch the boards.

Precautions Before Operation


l

You are recommended to keep the installation materials in equipment room, such as the
vacuum forming boxes and ESD bags, for future use.

Keep the boards and other electrostatic sensitive components in ESD bags. Do not pack or
hold the boards or parts using polystyrene foam, common plastic bags, or paper bags.

Ensure that the cabinet is well grounded before inserting the board into the subrack.
Otherwise, the board will be severely damaged.

Precautions During Operation


l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or gloves and ensure that the ESD wrist strap is well grounded.

Place the board on an ESD pad when replacing board hardware or chips. Use ESD tweezers
or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch board chips or pins with your bare hands.

Discharge the static electricity of the cables and protective sleeves before connecting them
to the ports.

Do not touch the PCB or any other part except jumpers and DIP switches during board
replacement with your bare hands.

Place removed boards and components on an ESD pad or other ESD materials. Do not pack
or hold the boards or parts using polystyrene foam, common plastic bags, or paper bags.

9.2 Operations of Replacing Boards and Subracks


This section describes how to replace a BSC6900 board. The replacement operations include
removing a board, removing a subrack, installing a board and installing a subrack.

9.2.1 Removing a Board


This section describes how to remove a BSC6900 board from a subrack.

Prerequisites
Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or
bag, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

Context
All the boards in the cabinet except the OMUa/OMUc board, are hot-swappable. For other
principles of removing a board, see 9.1 Precautions on Board Operation.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
The OMUa/OMUc board can be hot-swappable only after the operating system is shut down.

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
l

Remove a board (equipped with new ejector levers)


1.

Loosen the fastening screws on the board panel counterclockwise. Ensure that the
screws are fully detached from the subrack, as shown in part A of Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 Removing a board (equipped with new ejector levers)

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

2.

Press and hold down the two locking buttons on the board, flip the ejector levers
outward to unlock them, and rotate them outward until the board is separated from the
backplane, as shown in part B of Figure 9-1.

3.

Hold the two ejector levers and pull the board along the guide rails, as shown in part
C of Figure 9-1.

NOTICE
Pull the board steadily without shaking the board to avoid damage to the pins on the
backplane.
4.

Hold the bottom of the board with one hand, and hold the board panel with the other
hand to pull the board out of the subrack.

5.

Put the removed board in an ESD box or bag.

NOTICE
Do not touch the parts inside the board when you remove the board.
l

Remove a board (equipped with old ejector levers)


1.

Loosen the fastening screws on the board panel counterclockwise. Ensure that the
screws are fully detached from the subrack, as shown in part A of Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Removing a board (equipped with old ejector levers)

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

2.

Press the self-locking spring on the two ejector levers on the board panel, flip the
ejector levers outward to unlock them, and rotate them until the board is separated
from the backplane, as shown in part B of Figure 9-2.

3.

Hold the two ejector levers and pull the board along the guide rails, as shown in part
C of Figure 9-2.

NOTICE
Pull the board steadily without shaking the board to avoid damage to the pins on the
backplane.
4.

Hold the bottom of the board with one hand, and hold the board panel with the other
hand to pull the board out of the subrack.

5.

Put the removed board in an ESD box or bag.

NOTICE
Do not touch the parts inside the board when you remove the board.
----End

9.2.2 Removing a Subrack


This section describes procedures for removing a subrack.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dust-proof caps.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
l Replacing the subrack interrupts the services carried on the subrack.
l Replacing a subrack requires to be completed with caution during off-peak hours such as
midnight.
l A subrack is fairly heavy. For safety purposes, a 3-person group is recommended when
replacing the subrack.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the labels on the cables are legible. If the labels are illegible, relabel the cables
to avoid improper connection after the subrack is replaced.
Step 2 Record the installation positions of boards in the subrack and the DIP switch of the subrack.
Step 3 Check the types of the subrack to be replaced, and perform the related operations shown in the
following table:
If...

Then...

The subrack is an EPS Turn on the power switch controlling the subrack on the power
distribution box.
The subrack is an MPS 1. Raise the ejector levers of the OMU board, as shown in part B
of Removing the OMU board. Repeat this step if two OMU
boards are in the subrack.
2. Turn off its power switch if the OFFLINE indicator on the OMU
board is steady on.
Step 4 Turn off the power switch on the PDF.
Step 5 Remove the cables connected to the subrack.
Step 6 Remove boards from the subrack in sequence by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board. Then,
put them in ESD boxes or ESD bags.
Step 7 Remove the eight captive screws fixing the subrack on the cabinet from the front of the cabinet
using the Phillips screwdriver and reserve them for later use. Four captive screws are on the left
side and the other are on the right side.
Step 8 Disconnect the power cables, signal cables, and PGND cable from the subrack.
Step 9 One person pushes the subrack out along the guide rail from the back of the cabinet. The other
two persons hold the mounting ears and the bottom of the subrack to pull the subrack out of the
cabinet from the front. keep the removed subrack in a safe place for further processing.
----End

9.2.3 Installing a Subrack


This section describes procedures for adding a subrack.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a socket wrench, a Phillips
screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, dustfree cloth, a fiber cleaner,
and dust-proof caps.

The required parts are all ready, including subracks and screws.

If there is space in the cabinet, add the subrack there. If there is no space for a new subrack,
add a cabinet.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

NOTICE
A subrack is fairly heavy. For safety purposes, two persons are recommended when installing
the subrack.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the power switch for the new subrack according to instructions in 6.1 Distribution of
Power Switches.
Step 2 Optional: (This step is required only when floating nuts are not installed in the mounting bar at
the front side of the cabinet.) Take floating nuts out of the ESD bag at the bottom of the cabinet
and install them in the place highlighted in yellow, as shown in Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-3 Installation position of floating nuts

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTE

Three holes in the mounting bar are known as 1 U space. One subrack occupies 36 holes.
One subrack is fixed by 4 pairs of floating nuts installed symmetrically. The floating nuts are installed in the
3rd, 12th, 25th, and 34th holes above the guide rail where the subrack will be installed.

Step 3 Two persons hold the mounting ears and support the base of the subrack. Slide the subrack along
the guiding rail into the cabinet, and then fasten the screws to fix the subrack.
Step 4 Set the DIP switch based on the new subrack installation position according to instructions in
DIP Switch on a Subrack.

NOTICE
l You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the poweron is invalid.
l Different subracks must have different DIP-switch settings. If two subracks in the
BSC6900 share the same DIP-switch settings, services on the two subracks will be
interrupted.
l If the DIP-switch setting of the new subrack is the same as that of another subrack and services
in the two subracks are consequently interrupted, set the DIP switches of the two subracks
properly and reset the two subracks to restore services.
Step 5 Install the power cables for the new subrack:
Before the BSC6900 delivery, its subrack power cables have been bound in the cabinet.
Engineers only need to connect the power cables to the power ports on the subrack.
1.

Peel off the insulation layer of the power cable connector, as shown in Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Peeling off the insulation layer of the power cable connector

2.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Take off the cover of the power cable connection box and remove the screws in the power
ports, as shown in Figure 9-5.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-5 Power cable connection box

3.

Connect the power cables to the power ports in the subrack, as shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6 Connecting the power cable to the power port

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

4.

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Install the cover of the power cable connection box, as shown in Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7 Installing the cover of the power cable connection box

Step 6 Install boards.


Step 7 Install the inter-SCUa or inter-SCUb cables:
l If the new subrack is to be equipped with SCUa boards, install the inter-SCUa cables between
different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-SCUa Cables Between
Different Subracks.
l If the new subrack is to be equipped with SCUb boards, install inter-SCUb SFP+ high-speed
cables between different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-SCUb SFP
+ High-Speed Cables Between Different Subracks.
l If an SCUa board is configured in the original subrack and an SCUb board is configured in
a new subrack, refer to Figure 9-8 for connecting GE ports of the two boards.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-8 Connecting the SUCa and SUCb

Step 8 Installing the Y-Shaped Clock Cables.


Step 9 Install the Ethernet cables and optical fibers for connecting the interface boards.
Step 10 Attach the engineering labels to the signal cables according to instructions in Attaching the
Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.
Step 11 Check whether cables in the new subrack are correctly connected.
Step 12 Turn on the power switch controlling the subrack on the power distribution box.
Step 13 Commission the data loading and services.
For details on the commissioning methods, see BSC6900 UMTSCommissioning Guide.
Step 14 Check whether alarms related to subrack failure such as Cell Setup Failure are cleared after the
BSC6900 subrack is replaced. If these alarms persist, clear them by referring to the alarm online
help on the LMT. If these alarms still persist, contact Huawei technical support.
----End
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.2.4 Installing a board


This section describes how to insert a BSC6900 board into the subrack.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD
box or bag.

The board to be installed is ready and the DIP switches are correctly set.

Context

NOTICE
l Before inserting a board, wear an ESD Wrist Strap and plug the ESD wrist strap into the
ESD jack of the cabinet.
l Do not touch the parts inside the board when you remove the board.
For other principles of installing a BSC6900 board, see 9.1 Precautions on Board
Operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Take a new board out from the ESD box. Check the pins and socket on the board.
If there is any bent, missing, or broken pin or any bent socket, contact Huawei engineers for
replacement.
Step 2 As shown by part A of Figure 9-9, press the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers
to separate them from the self-locking latches, and rotate them outward to the extreme. Ensure
that the ejector levers are in the position shown in part B of Figure 9-9.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-9 Installing a board 1(equipped with new ejector levers)

Figure 9-10 Installing a board 2 (equipped with old ejector levers)

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 3 Hold the panel with one hand and the lower edge of the board with the other hand, and then push
the board into the subrack along the guide rails until the ejector levers are half closed.
Step 4 Turn the two ejector levers on the board inward until they are in full contact with the panel, as
shown in part C of Figure 9-9.
Step 5 Push the screws inward and tighten them clockwise to secure the board, as shown in part D of
Figure 9-9or Figure 9-10.
NOTE

You need to push the screws inwards to secure the screws into the holes on the subrack.

----End

9.3 Replacing an AEUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty AEUa board. The AEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about eight minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD
box or bag.

A new AEUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l Replacing the standby AEUa has no adverse impact on the system. When no standby AEUa
is in position, replacing the board interrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only an AEUa board, replacing
the AEUa board interrupts ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AEUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup

Go to Step 3.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if boards in slots 14 and 15 do not work in
active/standby mode, they both work in stand-alone mode.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal

1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to


standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
AEUa are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper
connection after the board is replaced.
Step 4 Disconnect the clock cable (if configured). Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable
connector with a flat-head screwdriver and remove the E1/T1 cable.
Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 6 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the AEUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
If...

Then...

The settings are correct

Go to Step 7.

The settings are incorrect

1. Set the DIP switches correctly.


2. Go to Step 7.

Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 8 Connect the E1/T1 cable and clock cable by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new
board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal

Go to Step 11.

The parameter is of any other values

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 11.


reported
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 12.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.4 Replacing an AOUa/AOUc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty AOUa/AOUc board. The AOUa/AOUc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

A new AOUa/AOUc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
l Replacing the standby AOUa/AOUc has no adverse impact on the system. If no standby
AOUa/AOUc is in position, replacing the board interrupts services carried on this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only an AOUa/AOUc board,
replacing the AOUa/AOUc board interrupts ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its
peer equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the AOUa/AOUc board to be
replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1, For example, if boards in slots 14 and 15 do not work in
active/standby mode, they both work in stand-alone mode.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Normal

1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to


standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the AOUa/
AOUc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The optical port is standby Go to Step 4.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The optical port is active

1. Run the DSP MSP command to query the MSP status.


l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT MSP command
to activate the MSP.
l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.
2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port
to standby status.
l If the active port is located in a slot with an even number,
set MSPCMD to MS(Manual switchover from
working link to protection link).
l If the active port is located in a slot with an odd number,
set MSPCMD to LOP(Lockout of Protection).
3. Go to Step 4.
NOTICE
Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local end and the peer end
have the same protection mode.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
AOUa/AOUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the AOUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
If...

Then...

The settings are correct

Go to Step 9.

The settings are incorrect

1. Set the DIP switches correctly.


2. Go to Step 9.

Step 9 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 10 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 11 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 12 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new
board.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal

Go to Step 14.

The parameter is of any other values

Go to Step 13.

Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 12.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 14.


reported
Step 14 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 15.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 12.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 15 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.5 Replacing the ASUa Board


This section describes how to replace the ASUa board when it becomes faulty. The ASUa board
supports hot swap. It takes about 15 minutes to remove the ASUa and load a new one.

Prerequisites
l

The required tools, including ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, ESD box or bag, are
ready.

A new ASUa board is ready.

You have logged into the LMT with an account authorized for this operation, and the
connection between the LMT and OMU is normal.

Context

NOTICE
Before operating a device or boards, ground the ESD wrist strap to prevent the electrostaticsensitive components from being damaged by static electricity in the human body. If no ESD
wrist strap or no proper grounding points are available, wear ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Replacing the ASUa interrupts services carried on the internal OMU.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST BRDBIND2ME command to check whether the ASUa board is occupied by
internal NEs.
If...

Then...

The ASUa board to be replaced is occupied by internal NEs

Go to Step 2.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The ASUa board to be replaced is not occupied by internal NEs

Go to Step 3.

Step 2 Run the DSP ME command to check whether the ASUa board to be replaced is occupied by the
internal OMU.
If...

Then...

1. Run the BKP ME command to back up key


The ASUa board is occupied by the
data of the internal OMU.
internal active OMU (dual OMU servers
mode)
2. Go to Step 3.
The ASUa board is occupied by the
internal standby OMU

Go to Step 3.

The ASUa board is not occupied by the


internal OMU

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Replace the ASUa board. Specifically, remove the faulty ASUa board from the subrack and
install a new one.
1.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Loosen the captive screw on the ASUa board counterclockwise with a screwdriver, as
shown in A of Figure 9-11.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-11 Removing the ASUa board

2.

Press the upper and lower locking buttons on the ASUa board and at the same time turn
the ejector levers outwards to enable the ASUa board to be detached from the self-locking
spring, as shown in B of Figure 9-11.

3.

After the OFFLINE indicator on the ASUa board fast blinks and the blue indicator is on
and steady, remove the faulty ASUa board.

4.

Turn the ejector levers outwards and enable the ASUa board to be detached from the
backplane. Remove the faulty ASUa board from the subrack, as shown in C of Figure
9-11.

5.

Press the upper and lower locking buttons on the ejector levers and turn ejector levels
outwards to the extreme, as shown in A of Figure 9-12.

6.

Slide the new ASUa board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in B of Figure
9-12.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-12 Installing the ASUa board

7.

Turn the upper and lower ejector levers inwards until the inner sides of the ejector levers
are in full contact with the panel, as shown in C of Figure 9-12.

8.

After the two ejector levels are caught at the locking position of the cross beam, tighten
captive screws clockwise to fix the board, as shown in D of Figure 9-12.
The new ASUa board is automatically loaded and the RUN indicator blinks (on for 0.125s
and off for 0.125s).

Step 4 When the RUN indicator blinks (on for 1s and off for 1s), run the DSP BRD command to query
the board status.
If...

Then...

CPU Status is Normal

Go to Step 5.

None of the preceding conditions is true

Go to Step 6.

Step 5 On the Browse Alarm tab page on the LMT, check whether alarms related to board faults are
reported.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms related to board faults are


reported

1. Analyze and clear the alarms based on the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 4.

No alarms related to board faults are


reported

Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the board version is consistent with the
version configuration.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


version configuration

Go to Step 7.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board
in the OMU active workspace installation
version configuration
\bin\fam on the OMU are correct. If the
program files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 4.

NOTE

You can obtain the board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 7 Run the DSP ME command to check the internal OMU status.
If...

Then...

The OMU status is normal (dual OMU servers mode) End


Others

Contact Huawei technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
1.

Record the site, slot, name, and version of the faulty board.

2.

Check whether there is any visible physical damage on the board, for example, mechanical
parts or plug-ins are distorted, pins are bent or lost, or the board is burnt.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

3.

Record the information about the fault location process, including the cause of the fault,
fault symptoms, alarm name, status of indicators on the board panel, and detailed
procedures for identifying and clearing the fault on site.

4.

Put the faulty board in an ESD bag, and place the onsite fault record and the ESD bag in
the board box.

5.

Contact the local Huawei office to deal with the faulty board.

9.6 Replacing a DPUb/DPUe Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty DPUb/DPUe board. The DPUb/DPUe board is
hot-swappable. It takes about 2 minutes from the time the original board is removed to the time
software is successfully loaded on the new board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD
box or bag.

A new DPUb/DPUe board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
In the process of replacing the DPUb/DPUe board, logically inhibiting the board does not
interrupt the services carried on the dedicated channels. Removing the board, however, interrupts
all the services carried on the board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Logical inhibited board or Physical Go to Step 2.


inhibited board includes the DPUb/
DPUe board to be replaced
Logical inhibited board or Physical 1. Run the INH BRD command to logically
inhibit the board.
inhibited board does not include the
DPUb/DPUe board to be replaced
2. Run the DSP UDSPRESOURCE command to
check the number of CS subscribers, number of all
types of subscribers, and number of cells and their
IDs carried on the DPUb/DPUe board. Based on
the check result, you can determine whether to
remove the board directly.
3. Go to Step 2.
NOTE
Logically inhibiting the DPUb/DPUe board prevents new
accesses from the board and reduces the impact of replacing
the board on the BSC6900 operation.

Step 2 Remove the DPUb/DPUe board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 3 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.
Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

Board status is Normal

Go to Step 7.

Board status is not Normal

Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Identify and rectify the fault according to the


alarm information.
2. Go to Step 5.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 7.


reported
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 8.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that the
new board is functional.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.7 Replacing a DEUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty DEUa board. The DEUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about 4 minutes from the time the original board is removed to the time software is
successfully loaded on the new board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD
box or bag.

A new DEUa board is ready.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
Replacing the DEUa board takes the BSC an extended period to perform seamless crystal voice
processing on AMR voice packets. This yields less significant voice quality improvements but
does not negatively affect voice services.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.
If...

Then...

Logical inhibited board or Physical Go to Step 2.


inhibited board includes the
Replacing the DEUa board
interrupts all the services carried on
the board. board to be replaced

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Logical inhibited board or Physical 1. Run the INH BRD command to logically
inhibit the board.
inhibited board does not include the
Replacing the DEUa board
2. Run the DSP UDSPRESOURCE command to
interrupts all the services carried on
check the number of CS subscribers, number of
the board. board to be replaced
all types of subscribers, and number of cells and
their IDs carried on the Replacing the DEUa
board interrupts all the services carried on the
board. board. Based on the check result, you can
determine whether to remove the board directly.
3. Go to Step 2.
NOTE
Logically inhibiting the Replacing the DEUa board
interrupts all the services carried on the board. board
prevents new accesses from the board and reduces the
impact of replacing the board on the BSC6900 operation.

Step 2 Remove the Replacing the DEUa board interrupts all the services carried on the board. board to
be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 3 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.
Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

Board status is Normal

Go to Step 7.

Board status is not Normal

Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Identify and rectify the fault according to the


alarm information.
2. Go to Step 5.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 7.


reported
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 8.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that the
new board is functional.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.8 Replacing an FG2a/FG2c Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty FG2a/FG2c board. The FG2a/FG2c board is hot
swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

A new FG2a/FG2c board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l If the FG2a/FG2c board is standby and the data over the port on the FG2a/FG2c board is
backed up and functions properly over the port on the active board. replacing the FG2a/
FG2c board has no adverse impact on the system.
l When the FG2a/FG2c boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing
mode, replacing the standby FG2a/FG2c board interrupts part of services if the traffic over
the ports exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the FG2a/FG2c boards
work in board backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby FG2a/FG2c board
interrupts all the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing an FG2a/FG2c board working in stand-alone mode interrupts all the services on
the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only an FG2a/FG2c board,
replacing the FG2a/FG2c board interrupts ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its
peer equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the FG2a/FG2c board to be
replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup

Go to Step 4 .

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if boards in slots 14 and 15 do not work in
active/standby mode, they both work in stand-alone mode.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the FG2a/FG2c board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the FG2a/
FG2c board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are configured in independent


mode

Go to Step 4.

The ports are configured in active/standby 1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
mode, and the ports are active
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby Go to Step 5.
mode, and the ports are standby
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the status of board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

IPPATH status is AVAILABLE

1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP


path.
2. Go to Step 5.

IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the Ethernet cable connected to the FG2a/FG2c board are legible.
If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the Ethernet cable to avoid improper connection
after replacing the board.
Step 6 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the faulty board.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 7 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.


Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Install the Ethernet cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new
board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal

Go to Step 12.

The parameter is of any other values

Go to Step 11.

Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 12.


reported
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 13 .

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 10.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.9 Replacing a GCGa/GCGb Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty GCGa/GCGb board. The replacement scenarios
include: replacing a GCGa board with another GCGa, replacing a GCGb board with another
GCGb board, replacing a GCGb board with a GCGa board, replacing a GCGa board with a
GCGb board. The GCGa/GCGb aboard is hot-swappable. It takes about 5 minutes from the time
cables on the board are disconnected to the time software is successfully loaded on the new
board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

A new GCGa/GCGb board is ready.

You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account. The LMT communicates with
the OMU properly.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

Procedure
Step 1 On the LMT, display the MPS in the Device Panel to check the configuration of the GCGa/
GCGb board.
If...

Then...

Slots 12 and 13 are equipped with the GCGa/GCGb board

Go to Step 2.

Only slot 12 or 13 is equipped with the GCGa/GCGb board

Go to Step 3.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board over
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, in the early
morning.

Under other circumstances

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Modify the board setting.


If...

Then...

Replacing a board with a board of the Go to Step 4.


same hardware version (Including a
GCGa board is replaced by another
GCGa board, a GCGb board is replaced
by another GCGb board)

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Replacing a board with a board of a later l Run the MOD BRD command on the LMT to
hardware version (Including a GCGb
modify board settings.
board is replaced by a GCGa board, a
NOTE
GCGa board is replaced by a GCGb
After the type of a board is changed using the MOD
BRD command, the corresponding slot will
board)
automatically and immediately reset.

l Go to Step 4.
Step 4 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the GCGa/GCGb board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, re-label the cables to avoid faulty connections after replacing the board.
Step 5 Disconnect the cables from the board to be replaced.
Step 6 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.
Step 8 Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN indicator blinks one second on and one second off, run the DSP BRD command to
query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

Only one GCGa/GCGb board is configured and CPU status is Active Go to Step 11.
normal
Two GCGa/GCGb boards are configured and CPU status of the
GCGa/GCGb board to be replaced is Standby normal

Go to Step 11.

Under other circumstances

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether alarms related to board faults are reported on the LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms related to board faults are


reported

1. Find out the cause and clear the alarms by


referring to the online alarm reference.
2. Go back to Step 9.

No alarm related to board faults is


reported

Go to Step 11.

Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with version mapping of the boards.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board software version is consistent


with version mapping of the boards

Go to Step 12.

The board software version is inconsistent 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
with version mapping of the boards
\fam on the OMU board are correct. If the
files are incorrect, contact Huawei engineers
for the correct files.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go back to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct version mapping of the boards from the corresponding version document.

Step 12 Run the DSP CLK command to query the clock status of the SCUa board and the SCUb
board in the MPS.
If...

Then...

The clock status of the SCUa board and the SCUb board
are Normal

The replacement is complete.

The clock status of the SCUa board and the SCUb board
are Abnormal

Go to Step 9

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.10 Replacing a GCUa/GCUb Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty GCUa/GCUb board. The replacement scenarios
include: replacing a GCUa board with another GCUa board, replacing a GCUb with another
GCUb board, replacing a GCUb board with a GCUa board, and replacing a GCUa with a GCUb
board. The GCUa/GCUb aboard is hot-swappable. It takes about 5 minutes from disconnecting
the cables from the board to loading software successfully.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

A new GCUa/GCUb board is ready.

You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account. The LMT communicates with
the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

Procedure
Step 1 On the LMT, display the MPS in the Device Panel to check the configuration of the GCUa/
GCUb board.
If...

Then...

Slots 12 and 13 are equipped with the GCUa/GCUb board

Go to Step 2.

Only slot 12 or 13 is equipped with the GCUa/GCUb board

Go to Step 3.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board over
to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Replace a subrack with caution, and implement the replacement
quickly when traffic is light, for example, in the early morning.

Under other circumstances

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Modify the board setting.


If...

Then...

Replacing a board with a board of the Go to Step 4.


same hardware version (Including a
GCUa board is replaced by another
GCUa board, a GCUb board is replaced
by another GCUb board)
Replacing a board with a board of a later l Run the MOD BRD command on the LMT to
hardware version (Including a GCUb
modify board settings.
board is replaced by a GCUa board, a
NOTE
GCUa board is replaced by a GCUb
After the type of a board is changed using the MOD
BRD command, the corresponding slot will
board
automatically and immediately reset.

l Go to Step 4.
Step 4 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the GCUa/GCUb board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, re-label the cables to avoid faulty connections after replacing the board.
Step 5 Disconnect the cables from the board to be replaced.
Step 6 Remove the board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.
Step 8 Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN indicator blinks one second on and one second off, run the DSP BRD command to
query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

Only one GCUa/GCUb board is configured and CPU status is Active


normal

Go to Step 11.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Two GCUa/GCUb boards are configured and CPU status of the


GCUa/GCUb board to be replaced is Standby normal

Go to Step 11.

Under other circumstances

Go to Step 10.

Step 10 Check whether alarms related to board faults are reported on the LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms related to board faults are


reported

1. Find out the cause and clear the alarms by


referring to the online alarm reference.
2. Go back to Step 9.

No alarm related to board faults is


reported

Go to Step 11.

Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with version mapping of the boards.
If...

Then...

The board software version is consistent


with version mapping of the boards

Go to Step 12.

The board software version is inconsistent 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
with version mapping of the boards
\fam on the OMU board are correct. If the
files are incorrect, contact Huawei engineers
for the correct files.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go back to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct version mapping of the boards from the corresponding version document.

Step 12 Run the DSP CLK command to query the clock status of the SCUa board and the SCUb
board in the MPS.
If...

Then...

The clock status of the SCUa board and the SCUb board
are Normal

The replacement is complete.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The clock status of the SCUa board and the SCUb board
are Abnormal

Go to Step 9

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.11 Replacing a GOUc/GOUe Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUc/GOUe board. The GOUc/GOUe board is
hot-swappable. The replacement scenarios include: replacing a GOUc board with another
GOUc, replacing a GOUe board with another GOUe board, replacing a GOUe board with a
GOUc board, replacing a GOUc board with a GOUe board. It takes about 5 minutes from the
time that cables on the original board are removed to the time software is successfully loaded
on the new board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

A new GOUc/GOUe board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l If the GOUc/GOUe board is standby and the data over the port on the GOUc/GOUe board
are backed up, replacing the standby GOUc/GOUe board has no adverse impact on the
system.
l When the GOUc/GOUe boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing
mode, replacing the standby GOUc/GOUe board interrupts part of services if the total traffic
over the ports exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUc/GOUe
boards work in board backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUc/
GOUe board interrupts all the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOUc/GOUe board working in stand-alone mode interrupts the services on that
board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only a GOUc/GOUe board,
replacing the GOUc/GOUe board interrupts ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its
peer equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUc/GOUe board to be
replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup

Go to Step 5.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if boards in slots 14 and 15 do not work in
active/standby mode, they both work in stand-alone mode.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUa/GOUc/GOUe board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUc/
GOUe board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are configured in independent


mode

Go to Step 4.

The ports are configured in active/standby 1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
mode, and the ports are active
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby Go to Step 5.
mode, and the ports are standby
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the status of board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

IPPATH status is AVAILABLE

1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP


path.
2. Go to Step 5.

IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Modify the board setting.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Replacing a board with a board of the same Go to Step 6.


hardware version (Including a GOUc
board is replaced by another GOUc board,
a GOUe board is replaced by another
GOUe board
Replacing a board with a board of a later l Run the MOD BRD command on the LMT
hardware version (Including a GOUe
to modify board settings.
board is replaced by a GOUc board, a
l Go to Step 6.
GOUc board is replaced by a GOUe board)
Step 6 Check whether the labels on the optical cable connected to the GOUc/GOUe are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board
is replaced.
Step 7 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 8 Remove the board by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 9 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 10 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new
board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal

Go to Step 13.

The CPU is in another status

Go to Step 12.

Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 13.


reported
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 14.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMUa are correct. If the
program files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 14 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 15 directly.
Step 15 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.12 Replacing a GOUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty GOUa board. The GOUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

A new GOUa board is ready.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l If the GOUa board is standby and the data over the port on the GOUa board are backed up,
replacing the standby GOUa board has no adverse impact on the system.
l When the GOUa boards work in board backup mode and the ports work in load sharing mode,
replacing the standby GOUa board interrupts part of services if the total traffic over the ports
exceeds the bandwidth of the ports on the active board. When the GOUa boards work in
board backup mode with independent ports, replacing the standby GOUa board interrupts
all the services carried on the standby board.
l Replacing a GOUa board working in stand-alone mode interrupts the services on that board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only a GOUa board, replace the
GOUa board interrupts ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its peer equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the GOUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup

Go to Step 4 .

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if boards in slots 14 and 15 do not work in
active/standby mode, they both work in stand-alone mode.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the GOUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP ETHPORT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the GOUa
board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are configured in independent


mode

Go to Step 4.

The ports are configured in active/standby 1. Run the SWP ETHPORT command to
switch the active port to standby status.
mode, and the ports are active
2. Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/standby Go to Step 5.
mode, and the ports are standby
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the status of board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

IPPATH status is AVAILABLE

1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP


path.
2. Go to Step 5.

IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cable connected to the GOUa are legible. If the labels
are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board is
replaced.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new
board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal

Go to Step 12.

The CPU is in another status

Go to Step 11.

Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 12.


reported
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 13.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMUa are correct. If the
program files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 10.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing. Check whether the optimization feature runs normally. For details, see the
Activation Observation section of the Engineering Guidelines chapter in Adaptive ICIC,
Automatic Neighbor Relation UMTS, Automatic Neighbor Relation GSM, and Scrambling
Code Self-Optimization UMTS.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.13 Replacing a NIUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty NIUa board. The NIUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about two minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD
box or bag.

A new NIUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the inhibited status of the board.
If...

Then...

The query result of Logical INH Status or Go to Step 2.


Physical INH Status includes the NIUa
board to be replaced
The query result of Logical INH Status 1. Run the INH BRD command to physically
inhibit the board.
and Physical INH Status does not include
the NIUa board to be replaced
2. Go to Step 2.
Step 2 Remove the NIUa board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 3 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 4 Run the UIN BRD command to unblock the new board.
Step 5 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Normal

Go to Step 7.

CPU status is not Normal

Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.


If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Identify and rectify the fault according to the


alarm information.
2. Go to Step 5.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 7.


reported
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 8.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 8 Test the CS services by dialing and the PS services by browsing web pages to ensure that the
new board is functional.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.14 Replacing an OMU Board


This section describes how to replace an OMU board. A faulty OMU board needs to be replaced
to prevent data from being lost when OMU operation and maintenance are interrupted due to
disconnection between the OMU and host boards. For details about how to replace an OMU
board for other purposes, also see this section.

Prerequisites
l

The tools required for replacing an OMU board are prepared: an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips
screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, a wrench, and an ESD box or bag.

A new OMU board is prepared.

The following installation information about the OMU board to be replaced is obtained:
FTP server password

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Administrator password
Operating system (OS) type of the OMU board
Information about all IP addresses of the OMU board, including external fixed IP
address (external gateway IP address), external virtual IP address, internal fixed IP
address, internal virtual IP address, backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs, and debugging IP address.
l

The version software required for installing the new OMU board is obtained. A
Dopra_Linux_U tool, SUSE Linux OS installation disk, or Windows 2003 OS installation
disk is prepared for a new OMU board whose OS is Dopra Linux, SUSE Linux, and
Windows 2003 respectively.
NOTE

Contact Huawei engineers who can obtain the installation package and tool by performing the
following operation:
l Obtaining the version installation package:
1. Contact Huawei engineers to obtain the version installation package from http://
support.huawei.com/carrier/#click=main3 and enter Software Version in the search
window. Then, download the version installation package.
2. Click Software Version VER to obtain the BSC6900 version installation package.
l Obtaining the USB Disk Tool:
l Contact Huawei engineers to obtain the USB Disks tool from http://support.huawei.com/
carrier/#click=main3 and enter SingleRAN_O&M tools in the search window. Then,
download the USB Disks tool.

Context
Figure 9-13 shows the procedure for replacing an OMU board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-13 Procedure for replacing an OMU board

9.14.1 Checking OMU Status Before Replacing an OMU Board


This section describes how to check the OMU status before replacing an OMU board. To ensure
OMU data consistency before and after a replacement, users need to check the status of the OMU
board to be replaced before a replacement. Users need to query and record the OMU board
information, active or standby state, and data synchronization status.

Prerequisites
l

The OMU board to be replaced is not faulty and can perform operation and maintenance
functions.

Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot perform operation and maintenance
functions, skip the task in this section. Obtain the latest OMU system backup data and replace
the OMU board by referring to 9.14.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU
Mode, 9.14.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-OMU Mode, or 9.14.5
Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in Dual-OMU Mode.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Procedure
Step 1 Check the OMU routing forward function status of the OMU board to be replaced.
Option

Description

Log in as a common or lgnusr user 1. Log in as a common or lgnusr user. For details, see
Logging In to the OMU in the BSC6900 UMTS
OMU Administration Guide.
2. Enter su
3. Enter the root user password to switch the user
account from common user or lgnusr user to root
user.
4. Enter cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam to go to
the directory where the ip_forward.sh script is
saved.
5. Enter chmod +x root_login.sh to make the
ip_forward.sh script executable.
6. Enter ./ip_forward.sh status to query the status of
OMU route forwarding.
7. Type ./ip_forward.sh, and press Enter. Enable or
disable the OMU route forwarding function based
on the command help.
Log in as the user root

1. Log in to the OMU as a root user. For details, see


Logging In to the OMU in the BSC6900 UMTS
OMU Administration Guide.
2. Enter cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam to go to
the directory where the ip_forward.sh script is
saved.
3. Enter chmod +x root_login.sh to make the
ip_forward.sh script executable.
4. Enter ./ip_forward.sh status to query the status of
OMU route forwarding.

NOTE

Parameter description
l Configuration status indicates the OMU route forwarding status to be configured.
l Actual status indicates the status of OMU route forwarding.
l enabled indicates that OMU route forwarding is enabled. disabled indicates that OMU route forwarding is
disabled.

Step 2 Optional: When logging in as the user root, skip this step. When the OMU board is an OMUc
board, users need to check and record the Forbid User Root to Log In status of the OMU board
to be replaced.
1.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Log in to the OMU as a root user. For details, see Logging In to the OMU in the BSC6900
UMTS OMU Administration Guide.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

2.

Enter su

3.

Enter the root user password to switch the user account from common user or lgnusr user
to root user.

4.

Enter cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam to go to the directory where the root_login.sh


script is saved.

5.

Enter chmod +x root_login.sh to make the root_login.sh script executable.

6.

Enter ./root_login.sh status to query the status of root user login to the OMU using SSH.

7.

Type ./root_login.sh, and press Enter. Enable or disable the remote login function for user
root based on the command help.
NOTE

Parameter description:
l Configuration status specifies the status that the user root needs to be set to.
l Actual status means the status of the user root.
l enabled means that the user root is allowed to log in to the OMU. disabled means that the user root is
forbidden to log in to the OMU.
l If the returned result is The script does not support this system!, the operating system of the OMUc board
does not support the Forbid User Root function.

Step 3 Log in to the LMT by referring to Log in to the LMT.


Step 4 Check consistency in the configuration data, version software, and license.
1.

Run the MML command ACT CRC to check whether the configuration data of all
BSC6900 host boards and the OMU board is consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the data is consistent.

2.

Run the MML command CMP BRDVER to check whether the running versions of all
BSC6900 host boards and the OMU board are consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the versions are consistent.

3.

Run the MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the licenses of all BSC6900
host boards and the OMU board are consistent.
Expected result: The returned result shows that the licenses are consistent.
NOTE

l If the configuration data is inconsistent, resolve it by referring to the handling suggestions in ALM-20736
Data Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
l If the software versions are inconsistent, resolve it by referring to ALM-20733 Software Version
Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
l If the licenses are inconsistent, resolve it by referring to ALM-20734 License Inconsistency Between OMU
and Host.

Step 5 Run the MML command LST VER. Query and record the value of OS type.
Step 6 Run the MML command LST TZ. Query and record the time zone and daylight saving
time.
Step 7 Run the MML command LST MBSCMODE. Query and record the OMU mode.
Step 8 Query and record the external gateway IP address of the OMU board to be replaced.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Option

Description

If the OMU OS is Dopra Linux or SUSE 1. Log in to the OMU by referring to Logging In
to the OMU.
Linux
2. Enter the command route and press Enter.
Query and record the value of Gateway whose
Destination is set to default.
If the OMU OS is Windows

1. Log in to the OMU by referring to Logging In


to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press
Enter to enter the OMU command mode.
3. Enter the command ipconfig and press Enter.
Query and record the value of Default
Gateway corresponding to External Network
Team.

Step 9 Query the information about the OMU board to be replaced.


l When the board is OMUa board, run the MML command DSP OMU, and record the
information in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 OMU board status information table
Item

Setting Information Example

Computer name

OMU_21

Internal network fixed IP

172.16.3.50

External network fixed IP

10.168.172.2

Backup network IP

192.168.3.50

Operational state

Active normal

Version

XXXXXX

External network virtual IP

10.168.192.5

External network virtual IP mask

255.255.254.0

Internal network virtual IP

172.16.3.40

Internal network virtual IP mask

255.0.0.0

Data-sync state

Normal

l When the board is OMUc board, run the DSP OMU and record in Table 9-2. The Backup
network IP is based on the following:
Run the ifconfig bond3 command to query the backup network IP of B_UPDATE0.
Run the ifconfig bond4 command to query the backup network IP of B_UPDATE1.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-2 OMU board status information table


Item

Setting Information Example

Computer name

OMU_21

Internal network fixed IP

172.16.3.50

External network fixed IP

10.168.172.2

Backup network IP of B_UPDATE0

192.168.9.50

Backup network IP of B_UPDATE1

192.168.3.50

Operational state

Active normal

Version

XXXXXX

External network virtual IP

10.168.192.5

External network virtual IP mask

255.255.254.0

Internal network virtual IP

172.16.3.40

Internal network virtual IP mask

255.0.0.0

Data-sync state

Normal

NOTE

l If only one OMU board is configured, Data-sync state is not included in the queried information.
l Query and record the debugging IP address of the OMU board to be replaced.
l If the OMU operating system is Dopra Linux, log in to the OMU and execute ifconfig bond2 to query
the debugging IP address.
l If the OMU operating system is SUSE Linux, log in to the OMU and execute ifconfig eth2 to query the
debugging IP address.
l If the OMU operating system is Windows, log in to the OMU and query the debugging IP address
configured in Eth2 properties of Network Connections.

If...

Then...

The MPS is equipped with two OMU


boards

Perform operations described in Step 10.

The MPS is equipped with one OMU board Perform operations described in 9.14.2
Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in
Single-OMU Mode.
Step 10 Run the MML command DSP OMUMODULE to query the status of the OMU processes.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

State is Active or Stopped

Perform operations described in Step 11.

State is Abnormal

Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 11 Check whether the OMU board to be replaced is active or standby.


If...

Then...

The board is in Standby normal state Perform operations described in 9.14.3


Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in
Dual-OMU Mode.
The board is in Active normal state

Perform operations described in Step 12.

Step 12 Based on Data-sync state queried in Step 9, do as follows:


If...

Then...

Data-sync state is not Data


synchronization is successful

Clear alarms by referring to ALM-20701


OMU Failure Switchover and ALM-20704
OMU Data Synchronization Failure. Go to
Step 13 after the alarms are cleared.

Data-sync state is Data synchronization Perform operations described in Step 13.


is successful
Step 13 Run the MML command SWP OMU to manually switch over the active and standby OMU
boards. Wait 5 minutes, and run the DSP OMU command to check that the OMU board to be
replaced is in the standby state and Data-sync state is set to Data synchronization is
successful. Replace the OMU board by referring to 9.14.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby
OMU in Dual-OMU Mode.
----End

9.14.2 Scenario: Replacing an OMU Board in Single-OMU Mode


This section describes how to replace an OMU board when only one OMU is configured on
BSC6900. In this scenario, OMU operation and maintenance of the host boards are interrupted.

Context
l

Replacing an OMU board in single-OMU mode will disconnect the OMU board from the
host boards and interrupt OMU operation and maintenance. System running data during
this period of time will be lost.

Replacing an OMU board in single-OMU mode occurs in one the following scenarios:
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same OS


This section describes how to replace an OMU board of a BSC6900 configured with only one
OMU board when the OMU board to be replaced and the new OMU board run the same operating
system (OS).

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.


Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In this step,
set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

3.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Optional: Apply for a digital certificate.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

4.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers.

Optional: Replacing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers
1.

Unscrew the captive screws on the OMU board counterclockwise, as shown in part A
of Figure 9-14.
Figure 9-14 Removing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers

NOTE

The preceding figure takes an OMUa board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc board
is similar.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

2.

Optional: If the board is an OMUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.

3.

Press and hold the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers on the OMU
board panel to unlock them, as shown in part B of Figure 9-14.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

4.

Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if
configured) from the OMU board after the OFFLINE LED flashes fast and then is
steady blue.

5.

Fully rotate the ejector levers outwards of the OMU board to separate it from the
backplane. Remove the OMU board along the guide rails, as shown in part C of Figure
9-14.

6.

Press and hold the two locking buttons of the new board, flip outward the ejector levers
to separate them from the self-locking latch, and rotate them until they cannot be
rotated, as shown in part A of Figure 9-15.

7.

Slide the new board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in part B of Figure
9-15.
Figure 9-15 Installing an OMU board that is configured with new ejector levers

NOTE

l The preceding figure takes an OMUa board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc
board is similar.
l The OMUa board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS
at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
l The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the
MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

8.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Flip inward the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown
in part C of Figure 9-15.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.

Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 9-15.
The new board automatically loads software and configuration data, and the RUN
LED blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.

10. Connect the cables by referring to the labels.


l

Optional: Replacing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers
1.

Unscrew the captive screws on the OMU board counterclockwise, as shown in part A
of Figure 9-16.
Figure 9-16 Removing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

NOTE

The preceding figure takes an OMUa board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc board
is similar.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

2.

Optional: If the board is an OMUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.

3.

Flip outward the ejector levers of the OMU board, as shown in part B of Figure
9-16.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

4.

Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if
configured) from the OMU board after the OFFLINE LED flashes fast and then is
steady blue.

5.

Fully rotate the ejector levers outwards of the OMU board to separate it from the
backplane. Remove the OMU board along the guide rails, as shown in part C of Figure
9-16.

6.

Flip outward the ejector levers of the new OMU board, as shown in part A of Figure
9-17.

7.

Slide the new board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in part B of Figure
9-17.
Figure 9-17 Installing an OMU board that is configured with old ejector levers

NOTE

l The preceding figure takes an OMUa board as an example. The procedure for an OMUc
board is similar.
l The OMUa board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS
at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
l The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the
MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

8.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Flip inward the ejector levers of the OMU board until they are in position, as shown
in part C of Figure 9-17.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.

Secure the screws on the OMU board, as shown in part D of Figure 9-17.
The new board automatically loads software and configuration data, and the RUN
LED blinks 0.125 second on and 0.125 second off.

10. Connect the cables by referring to the labels.


l

Install product software and change IP addresses of the new OMU.


1.

Install product software as instructed in Table 9-3.


Table 9-3 Criteria for operations (1)
If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux or Suse
Linux

1. Optional: Uninstall the product software on the new


OMU board.
NOTE
If the new OMU board is configured with the product
software, perform this step to uninstall the product software
of an earlier version.
If the new OMU board is not configured with the OMU
applications, skip this step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed


IP address.
b. Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start to start the omud
c. Enter uninstall_bam in any directory of the OMU.
d. The message Uninstall standby area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to
uninstall the product software from the standby
workspace of the standby OMU.
e. Enter uninstall_bam.
f. The message Uninstall main area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Perform the
following operations based on actual conditions.
2. Install product software as instructed in Install product
software of Scenario: Old OMU Running SUSE
Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Windows

1. Optional: Uninstall the product software on the new


OMU board.
NOTE
If the new OMU board is configured with the product
software, perform this step to uninstall the product software
of an earlier version.
If the new OMU board is not configured with the OMU
applications, skip this step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed


IP address.
b. Run the net start omud command to start the omud
c. Click Start > Run and the Run interface is
displayed.
d. In the Run interface, run the uninstall_bam
command and clickOK.
e. EnterY, and press Enter until the Uninstall OMU
succeed! message is displayed.
f. Go to 4 after uninstalling the product software in the
standby workspace. Perform to 5 uninstall the
product software in the active workspace. This task
is completed.
2. Install product software as instructed in Install product
software of Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows
and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.

2.

Change IP addresses of the new OMU so that they match those of the OMU board to
be replaced, as instructed in Table 9-4.
Perform either of the following operation to change IP addresses of the new OMU:
Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can be performed only if the
local commissioning network adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about
this operation, see the description of the MOD OMUIP command in the MML
command reference.
Use the omutool to change IP addresses of the OMU. For details, see the following
steps.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-4 Criteria for operations (2)


If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux

1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/


bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l Execute ./omutool innercard IP address to change
the internal fixed IP address.
l Execute ./omutool innervip IP address to change
the internal virtual IP address.
l Execute ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) to change the external fixed IP address
and subnet mask.
l Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway IP address) to change the external virtual
IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
l Use the command ./omutool
backupcard_for_omuc IP address to change the
backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet adapter on an
OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool
backupcard_for_omua IP address to change the
backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet adapter on an
OMUc board.
l Execute ./omutool debugcard IP address to change
the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press


Enter to start the omud process.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is Suse


Linux

1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/


version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l Execute ./omutool innercard IP address to change
the internal fixed IP address.
l Execute ./omutool innervip IP address to change
the internal virtual IP address.
l Execute ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) to change the external fixed IP address
and subnet mask.
l Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway IP address) to change the external virtual
IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
l Execute ./omutool debugcard IP address to change
the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press


Enter to start the omud process.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Windows

1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to


enter the OMU command mode.
2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin
\bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing omutool.
3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.
l Execute omutool innercard IP address to change
the internal fixed IP address.
l Execute omutool innervip IP address to change the
internal virtual IP address.
l Execute omutool extercard IP address subnet
mask (gateway IP address) to change the external
fixed IP address and subnet mask.
l Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway IP address) to change the external virtual
IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
l Execute omutool debugcard IP address to change
the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.

4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud


progress.

3.
l

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive as shown in Table
9-5.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-5 Criteria for operations (3)


If...

Then...

The OMU OS is Suse


Linux

Contact Huawei engineers to obtain the Hash value calculation


tool from http://support.huawei.com/carrier/#click=main3
and enter SingleRAN_O&M tools in the search window.
Then, download the OMU Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and
get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver
and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900
Upgrade Guide to OMU O&M Panel Adapter Driver to
upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.

The OMU OS is
Windows

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Download and decompress the Upgrade Guide to OMU


Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rar file from the release document. Decompress the package
and obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating
System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Restore OMU data.


1.

Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.

2.

Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

3.

Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.

4.

Perform operations described in Table 9-6 based on the OMU OS type.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-6 Criteria for operations (4)


If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux

1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP


address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press
Enter to stop the omud process.
3. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services
and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
the omu_backup_linker tool.
4. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
backup file pathname : ." Type the backup
file save path and the file name and press Enter. The
system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure, for example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
7. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press
Enter to start the omud process.

The OMU OS is Suse


Linux

1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP


address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press
Enter to stop the omud process.
3. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/
common/services and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
4. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
backup file pathname : ." Type the backup
file save path and the file name and press Enter. The
system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure, for example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
7. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press
Enter to start the omud process.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU OS is
Windows

1. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP


address. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to
enter the OMU command mode.
3. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud
progress.
4. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common
\services and press Enter to navigate to the directory
containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press
Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. Type the backup file save path and the file name and
press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure,
for example, "Restore OMU database
succeed!" may be displayed.
8. Type the command net start omud to start the omud
progress.

Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Board Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board Running
SUSE Linux/Windows
This section describes how to replace an OMU board of a BSC6900 equipped with only one
OMU board when the OMU board to be replaced runs the Dopra Linux operating system (OS)
and the new OMU board runs the SUSE Linux/Windows OS.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Flash Drive. The operation type is set to Install and product software and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This facilitates user operations. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS but directly
install product software on the new OMU board by referring to Install product software of the
new OMU. in Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.


Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In this step,
set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an
OMU board that is equipped with old ejector levers.

Use the USB installation disk to switch the OMU OS and install product software.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

1.

Optional: If the OMU BIOS version is V013 or V031, prepare a serial cable, monitor,
and USB keyboard so that the OMU can be restarted from the USB flash drive. For
details, see Setting the First Boot Device of the OMU to USB.

2.

Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.

3.

Remove and insert the OMU board to reset it.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

4.

Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 9-7.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status. See Table 9-8.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For details about the time needed for the OMU operating system installation, see Table 1 in Preparing
a USB Flash Drive.

Table 9-7 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed
Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-8 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system and product software installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed
Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or
off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or
off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

NOTE

l When using a USB installation disk with the operation type set to Install, you must restore the
OMU data.
l When using a USB installation disk with the operation type set to Switch, you do not need to
restore the OMU data.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Restore OMU data.


1.

Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

2.

Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.

3.

Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.

4.

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.

5.

Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to


the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

6.

Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the


omu_backup_linker tool.

7.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type


restore and press Enter.

8.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file


pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure, for example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

9.

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running SUSE Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the OMU on BSC6900 with a single OMU when the
operating system on the OMU to be replaced is SUSE Linux and that on the new OMU is Dopra
Linux.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This facilitates user operations. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS but directly
install product software on the new OMU board by referring to Install product software of the
new OMU. in Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.


Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In this step,
set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

3.
l

Optional: Apply for a digital certificate.

Install SUSE Linux.


1.

On the LMT PC, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation source for SUSE Linux.
For details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating
an Installation Source for the Operating System.

2.

Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on each of the new OMUs.

3.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with old ejector levers.

4.

Use EasyInstall to install SUSE Linux. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

Install product software.


1.

Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.

2.

Connect to the debugging port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU through the
commissioning IP address. For details, see Uploading the Product Software
Installation Package to the OMU. (The file upload path is /BSC6000/data/mbsc/
upgrade.)

3.

Use the commissioning IP address to switch to the directory where the installation
package is saved. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
If the operating system is Dopra Linux, assume that product software installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/
setup. Enter the following command and press Enter.
cd /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

If the operating system is SUSE Linux, assume that product software installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/
VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and press
Enter.
cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

4.

Enter chmod +x ./install_bam.sh to obtain the permission to run ./install_bam.sh.

5.

Enter ./install_bam.sh.

6.

The system prompts you to type the product running mode. Type the product running
mode and press Enter.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

7.

The system prompts you to type the office name. Type the office name and press
Enter.
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

8.

The system prompts you to type the language version. Type the language version and
press Enter.
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

9.

The system prompts you to type the admin password. Type the admin password,
confirm it, and press Enter.
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()
_+-{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase
letter,digit or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

10. The system prompts you to type the FTP password. Type the FTP password, confirm
it, and press Enter.
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()
_+-{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase
letter,digit or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

11. Type the external virtual IP address or a valid external virtual configuration based on
the displayed message.
Example for entering the external virtual IP address:
# The extranet virtual IP.
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :

Example for entering the external virtual configuration:


# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

12. The system prompts you to type the OMU system type. Type the OMU installation
type based on the field configuration and press Enter. Table 1 describes the OMU
system types.
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single:Install stand-alone system
# Dual:Install dual-OMU system.
The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU
system.
Please input a valid install_type :

Table 9-9 Installation types


Parameters

Description

Single

When the BSC6900 is configured with


one OMU board, install product
software on the board in singleOMU
mode.

Dual

When the BSC6900 is configured with


two OMU boards, install product
software on the boards in dualOMU
mode.

13. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

14. Type Y to install product software. When the message Install OMU
succeed! is displayed, product software are successfully installed.
l

Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the replaced OMUs.
Perform either of the following operation to change IP addresses of the new OMU:
Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can be performed only if the local
commissioning network adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about this
operation, see the description of the MOD OMUIP command in the MML command
reference.
For details about how to adjust IP addresses of the OMU, see the following steps.
1.

Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press


Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.

2.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
Execute ./omutool innercard IP address to change the internal fixed IP address.
Execute ./omutool innervip IP address to change the internal virtual IP address.
Execute ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) to change the external
fixed IP address and subnet mask.
Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) to
change the external virtual IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Execute ./omutool debugcard IP address to change the commissioning IP


address.
NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

3.

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

4.

Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive. Contact Huawei
engineers to obtain the Hash value calculation tool from http://support.huawei.com/
carrier/#click=main3 and enter SingleRAN_O&M tools in the search window. Then,
download the OMU Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux
Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade
Guide to OMU O&M Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE

SUSE Linux has no operating system patch.

Recover the OMU data.


1.

Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.

2.

Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

3.

Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.

4.

Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.

5.

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.

6.

Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/services and press


Enter to navigate to the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

7.

Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the


omu_backup_linker tool.

8.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type


restore and press Enter.

9.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file


pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure, for example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

10. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
l

Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the OMU on BSC6900 with a single OMU when the
operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Windows and that on the new OMU is Dopra
Linux.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This facilitates user operations. To meet special requirements, do not switch the OS but directly
install product software on the new OMU board by referring to Install product software of the
new OMU. in Scenario: Old and New OMU Boards Running the Same OS.
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance, skip
procedures for backing up and saving the data and obtain the latest backup data for restoring the
data. The following procedures take a functional OMU board as an example.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Back up OMU system data to an OMU hard disk.


Run the MML command BKP DB to back up system files to the specified path. In this step,
set Path of Backup File and File Name to appropriate values.

Save the performance configuration files, SSL certificate files, license files, and OMU
system data to the LMT PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, seeFile Manager.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
NOTE

Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that
the OMU active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l License files are saved in the directory \bam\version_a\ftp\license.

3.
l
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Optional: Apply for a digital certificate.

Install Windows.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

1.

On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare a Windows installation source. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System, Creating an
Installation Source for the Operating System, and Creating an Installation Source for
the SetWin Software and OS Patches.

2.

Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on the new OMU.

3.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with old ejector levers.

4.

Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

Install product software.


1.

Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.

2.

Upload product software to the OMU.


a.

(Optional) If patches are installed during the installation, delete the original patch
files saved in the patch folder for product software, copy the patches (for
example, the V900R01XC0XSPCXXX folder) saved on the local computer to
the patch folder for product software.
Figure 9-18 show the directory structures of the patch installation package.
Figure 9-18 Directory structure of the patch installation package

3.

b.

Connect to the debugging Ethernet port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU
through the commissioning IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.

c.

Under drive D on the OMU, create the \mbsc\upgrade folder, right-click it, and
choose Sharing and Security.

d.

In the Properties dialog box, select Share this folder, set the read/write property,
and then click OK.

e.

On the local computer, choose Start > Run, enter \\OMU commissioning IP
address. In the displayed dialog box, enter the username and password, and click
OK.

f.

Copy product software installation package from the local computer to the \mbsc
\upgrade folder on the OMU.

Go to the V***R***C**\install\setup directory of the version installation package


and double-click install_bam.bat.
NOTE

V***R***C** is an example of the version installation package. During installation, see the actual
version.
The software integrity of the product software is checked before they are automatically installed.
The product software can be installed only if the check passes.

4.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Type the product running mode and press Enter.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :

5.

Type the office name and press Enter.


# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

6.

Type the language and press Enter.


# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

7.

Type the admin password and press Enter.


# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()
_+-{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase
letter,digit or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

8.

Type the ftp password and press Enter.


# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()
_+-{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase
letter,digit or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :
NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

9.

Type the external virtual IP address and press Enter.


# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :

10. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-10 Description


Parameter

Description

Single

When the BSC6900 is configured with


one OMU board, install the product
software on the board in single-OMU
mode.

Dual

When the BSC6900 is configured with


two OMU boards, install product
software on the board in dual-OMU
mode.

11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

12. Enter Y to install product software. When the message Install OMU
succeed! is displayed, product software are successfully installed.
l

Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
Perform either of the following operation to change IP addresses of the new OMU:
Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can be performed only if the local
commissioning network adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about this
operation, see the description of the MOD OMUIP command in the MML command
reference.
Use the omutool to change IP addresses of the OMU. For details, see the following
steps.
1.

Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.

2.

Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter to


navigate to the directory containing omutool.

3.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
Execute omutool innercard IP address to change the internal fixed IP address.
Execute omutool innervip IP address to change the internal virtual IP address.
Execute omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) to
change the external fixed IP address and subnet mask.
Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) to
change the external virtual IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa board.
Execute omutool debugcard IP address to change the commissioning IP address.
NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

4.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

5.

Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.

Download and decompress the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rar file from the release document. Obtain the Upgrade
Guide to OMU Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Recover the OMU data.


1.

Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.

2.

Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the
LMT. On the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.

3.

Select the target file on the LMT PC and click Upload to upload the saved OMU
system data to the active workspace. Ensure that the upload path is the same as the
backup data download path.

4.

Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.

5.

Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud progress.

6.

Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and press Enter to


navigate to the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.

7.

Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press Enter to start the


omu_backup_linker tool.

8.

A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type


restore and press Enter.

9.

Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter. The system starts
to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or failure, for example,
"Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.

10. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
l

Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

9.14.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in Dual-OMU Mode


This section describes how to replace the standby OMU board when two OMUs are configured
on BSC6900.

Context
l

The new OMUs can use the same operating system as the OMUs to be replaced or use
another operating system, but the active and standby OMUs must use the same operating
system.

The new OMUs must be of the same type as the OMUs to be replaced.

In dual-OMU mode, if the active OMU fails, the system automatically performs a
switchover. Therefore, only the standby OMU needs to be replaced.

Replacing the standby OMU board in dual-OMU mode occurs in following scenarios:

Scenario: Old and New OMUs Running the Same Operating System
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 equipped with two OMUs
when the OMU to be replaced and the new OMU have the same operating system.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the active
OMU and the standby one.
Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronization
between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
Step 3 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is equipped with old ejector levers.
Step 4 Perform operations in Table 9-11 based on the operating system.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-11 Criteria for operations


If...

Then...

The OMU operating


system is Dopra Linux
or SUSE Linux

1. Optional: Uninstall the product software on the new OMU


board.
NOTE
If product software has been installed on the new OMU board, perform
this step to uninstall the product software of an earlier version.
If no OMU application is installed on the new OMU board, skip this
step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the standby OMU by using the external fixed IP


address or the commissioning IP address. For details, see
Logging In to the OMU.
b. Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start to start the omud
c. Enter uninstall_bam in any directory of the OMU.
d. The message Uninstall standby area. input Y to
continue; input E to exit. is displayed. Enter Y to uninstall
the product software from the standby workspace of the
standby OMU.
e. Enter uninstall_bam.
f. The message Uninstall main area. input Y to continue;
input E to exit. is displayed. Perform the following
operations based on actual conditions.
2. Install product software. For details, see Install product
software. in Scenario: Old OMU Running SUSE Linux and
New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
3. Change the IP addresses of the new OMU.
l The OMU operating system is SUSE Linux, refer to
Change the IP addresses of the new OMU to those of the
OMU to be replaced.
l The OMU operating system is Dopra Linux:
Perform either of the following operation to change IP
addresses of the new OMU:
Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can
be performed only if the local commissioning network
adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about this
operation, see the description of the MOD OMUIP
command in the MML command reference.
Use the omutool to change IP addresses of the OMU.
For details, see the following steps.
a. Enter cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam to navigate to
the directory that contains omutool
b. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP
addresses of the replaced OMU board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

If...

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Then...
Execute ./omutool innercard IP address to change
the internal fixed IP address.
Execute ./omutool innervip IP address to change
the internal virtual IP address.
Execute ./omutool extercard IP address mask
(gateway) to change the external fixed IP address
and subnet mask.
Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask
(gateway IP address) to change the external virtual
IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of
the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
Execute ./omutool debugcard IP address to change
the commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately
disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board. Use the
new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the
OMU board again.

4. Install the operating system patch and upgrade Ethernet adapter


driver when the operating system is SUSE Linux. Contact
Huawei engineers to obtain the Hash value calculation tool
from http://support.huawei.com/carrier/#click=main3 and
enter SingleRAN_O&M tools in the search window. Then,
download the OMU Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get
Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver and
OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade
Guide to OMU O&M Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the
OMU adapter driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The OMU operating


system is Windows

1. Optional: Uninstall the product software on the new OMU


board.
NOTE
If product software has been installed on the new OMU board, perform
this step to uninstall the product software of an earlier version.
If no OMU application is installed on the new OMU board, skip this
step and proceed to b.

a. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external IP


address or the debugging IP address. For details, see
Logging In to the OMU.
b. Run the net start omud command to start the omud
c. Click Start > Run and the Run interface is displayed.
d. In the Run interface, run the uninstall_bam command and
clickOK.
e. EnterY, and press Enter until the Uninstall OMU
succeed! message is displayed.
f. Go to 4 after uninstalling the product software in the
standby workspace.Perform 5 to finish uninstalling the
product software in the active workspace. Then uninstalling
the product software on the standby OMU is finished.
2. Install product software. For details, see Install product
software in Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and
New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
3. Change the IP addresses of the new OMU board. For details,
see Change the IP addresses of the new OMU to those of
the OMU to be replaced in Scenario: Old OMU Running
Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
4. Download and decompress the Upgrade Guide to OMU
Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rar file from the release document. Decompress the package
and obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating
System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Step 5 Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.


----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Running SUSE Linux/
Windows
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 equipped with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is Dopra Linux and that on the new
OMUs is SUSE Linux/Windows.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Flash Drive. The operation type is set to Install and product software and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This facilitates user operations.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the active
OMU and the standby one.
Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronization
between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
Step 3 Connect a USB installation disk to a USB port on the new OMU.
Step 4 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is equipped with old ejector levers.
Step 5 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Check
the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating system
is installed successfully.
l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See
Table 9-12.
l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 9-13.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,
prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flash
drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For details about the time needed for the OMU operating system installation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB
Flash Drive.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-12 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system
installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 9-13 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system and
product software installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Step 6 Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.


----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Running Windows
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 equipped with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is Dopra Linux and that on the new
OMUs is Windows.

Prerequisites
l

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Flash Drive. The operation type is set to Install and product software and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This facilitates user operations.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the active
OMU and the standby one.
Step 2 Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the synchronization
between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.
Step 3 Connect a USB installation disk to a USB port on the new OMU.
Step 4 Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations, see
Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU
board that is equipped with old ejector levers.
Step 5 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Check
the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating system
is installed successfully.
l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See
Table 9-14.
l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 9-15.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,
prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flash
drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For details about the time needed for the OMU operating system installation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB
Flash Drive.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-14 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system
installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 9-15 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system and
product software installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Step 6 Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.


----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running SUSE Linux and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 equipped with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMUs to be replaced is SUSE Linux and that on the new
OMUs is Dopra Linux.

Prerequisites
l

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This facilitates user operations.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Stop the synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one and the omud
service.
1.

Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the
active OMU and the standby one.

2.

Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the
synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.

Install SUSE Linux.


1.

On the LMT PC, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation source for SUSE Linux.
For details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating
an Installation Source for the Operating System.

2.

Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on each of the new OMUs.

3.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with old ejector levers.

4.

Use EasyInstall to install SUSE Linux. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

Install product software.


1.

Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.

2.

Connect to the debugging port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU through the
commissioning IP address. For details, see Uploading the Product Software
Installation Package to the OMU. (The file upload path is /BSC6000/data/mbsc/
upgrade.)

3.

Use the commissioning IP address to switch to the directory where the installation
package is saved. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
If the operating system is Dopra Linux, assume that product software installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/
setup. Enter the following command and press Enter.
cd /mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

If the operating system is SUSE Linux, assume that product software installation
package install_bam.sh is saved in /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup. Enter the following command and press


Enter.
cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/upgrade/VXXXRXXXCXX/install/setup

4.

Enter chmod +x ./install_bam.sh to obtain the permission to run ./install_bam.sh.

5.

Enter ./install_bam.sh.

6.

The system prompts you to type the product running mode. Type the product running
mode and press Enter.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :

7.

The system prompts you to type the office name. Type the office name and press
Enter.
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

8.

The system prompts you to type the language version. Type the language version and
press Enter.
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

9.

The system prompts you to type the admin password. Type the admin password,
confirm it, and press Enter.
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()
_+-{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase
letter,digit or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

10. The system prompts you to type the FTP password. Type the FTP password, confirm
it, and press Enter.
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()
_+-{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase
letter,digit or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

11. Type the external virtual IP address or a valid external virtual configuration based on
the displayed message.
Example for entering the external virtual IP address:
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

# The extranet virtual IP.


Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :

Example for entering the external virtual configuration:


# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

12. The system prompts you to type the OMU system type. Type the OMU installation
type based on the field configuration and press Enter. Table 1 describes the OMU
system types.
# The OMU system type. eg: Single/Dual
# Single:Install stand-alone system
# Dual:Install dual-OMU system.
The dual-OMU system can effeciently increase the reliability of the OMU
system.
Please input a valid install_type :

Table 9-16 Installation types


Parameters

Description

Single

When the BSC6900 is configured with


one OMU board, install product
software on the board in singleOMU
mode.

Dual

When the BSC6900 is configured with


two OMU boards, install product
software on the boards in dualOMU
mode.

13. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

14. Type Y to install product software. When the message Install OMU
succeed! is displayed, product software are successfully installed.
l

Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
Perform either of the following operation to change IP addresses of the new OMU:
Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can be performed only if the local
commissioning network adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about this
operation, see the description of the MOD OMUIP command in the MML command
reference.
Use the omutool to change IP addresses of the OMU. For details, see the following
steps.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

1.

Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press


Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.

2.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
Execute ./omutool innercard IP address to change the internal fixed IP address.
Execute ./omutool innervip IP address to change the internal virtual IP address.
Execute ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) to change the external
fixed IP address and subnet mask.
Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) to
change the external virtual IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa board.
Execute ./omutool debugcard IP address to change the commissioning IP
address.
NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

3.
l

Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

Install the operating system patch and upgrade the adapter driver.Contact Huawei engineers
to obtain the Hash value calculation tool from http://support.huawei.com/carrier/
#click=main3 and enter SingleRAN_O&M tools in the search window. Then, download
the OMU Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet
Adapter Driver and OMU driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to
OMU O&M Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter driver.
NOTE

SUSE Linux has no operating system patch.

Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

Scenario: Old OMU Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux
This section describes how to replace the standby OMU on BSC6900 equipped with two OMUs
when the operating system on the OMU to be replaced is Windows and that on the new OMU
is Dopra Linux.

Prerequisites
l

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

Context
When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced, it is
recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU board.
This facilitates user operations.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Stop the synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one and the omud
service.
1.

Run the MML command STP DATASYNC to stop the synchronization between the
active OMU and the standby one.

2.

Run the MML command DSP OMU to check the status to make sure the
synchronization between the active OMU and the standby one is stopped.

Install Windows.
1.

On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare a Windows installation source. For
details, see Preparations for Reinstalling the OMU Operating System, Creating an
Installation Source for the Operating System, and Creating an Installation Source for
the SetWin Software and OS Patches.

2.

Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on the new OMU.

3.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced and insert the new one. For detailed operations,
see Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or
Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with old ejector levers.

4.

Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the OMU Operating
System by Using the EasyInstall Software.

Install product software.


1.

Set the IP address of the local computer to the same network segment as the
commissioning IP address of the OMU.

2.

Upload product software to the OMU.


a.

(Optional) If patches are installed during the installation, delete the original patch
files saved in the patch folder for product software, copy the patches (for
example, the V900R01XC0XSPCXXX folder) saved on the local computer to
the patch folder for product software.
Figure 9-19 show the directory structures of the patch installation package.
Figure 9-19 Directory structure of the patch installation package

b.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Connect to the debugging Ethernet port of the OMU, and log in to the OMU
through the commissioning IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

3.

c.

Under drive D on the OMU, create the \mbsc\upgrade folder, right-click it, and
choose Sharing and Security.

d.

In the Properties dialog box, select Share this folder, set the read/write property,
and then click OK.

e.

On the local computer, choose Start > Run, enter \\OMU commissioning IP
address. In the displayed dialog box, enter the username and password, and click
OK.

f.

Copy product software installation package from the local computer to the \mbsc
\upgrade folder on the OMU.

Go to the V***R***C**\install\setup directory of the version installation package


and double-click install_bam.bat.
NOTE

V***R***C** is an example of the version installation package. During installation, see the actual
version.
The software integrity of the product software is checked before they are automatically installed.
The product software can be installed only if the check passes.

4.

Type the product running mode and press Enter.


[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :

5.

Type the office name and press Enter.


# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

6.

Type the language and press Enter.


# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

7.

Type the admin password and press Enter.


# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()
_+-{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase
letter,digit or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

8.

Type the ftp password and press Enter.


# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()
_+-{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase
letter,digit or special character at least.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :
NOTE

l If a fixed external network IP address has been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address must be in the same network segment as the fixed
external network IP address for the OMU to be replaced.
l If a fixed external network IP address has not been configured for the OMU to be replaced, the
entered external network virtual IP address can be set based on the actual plan.

9.

Type the external virtual IP address and press Enter.


# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :

10. Enter the OMU installation type based on the field configuration and press Enter.
Table 1 describes the OMU installation types.
Table 9-17 Description
Parameter

Description

Single

When the BSC6900 is configured with


one OMU board, install the product
software on the board in single-OMU
mode.

Dual

When the BSC6900 is configured with


two OMU boards, install product
software on the board in dual-OMU
mode.

11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

12. Enter Y to install product software. When the message Install OMU
succeed! is displayed, product software are successfully installed.
l

Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
Perform either of the following operation to change IP addresses of the new OMU:
Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can be performed only if the local
commissioning network adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about this
operation, see the description of the MOD OMUIP command in the MML command
reference.
Use the omutool to change IP addresses of the OMU. For details, see the following
steps.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

1.

Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU command mode.

2.

Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and press Enter to


navigate to the directory containing omutool.

3.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Execute omutool innercard IP address to change the internal fixed IP address.


Execute omutool innervip IP address to change the internal virtual IP address.
Execute omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) to
change the external fixed IP address and subnet mask.
Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway IP address) to
change the external virtual IP address and subnet mask.
Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change the backup channel
IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet
adapter on an OMUa board.
Execute omutool debugcard IP address to change the commissioning IP address.
NOTE

Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT PC from the OMU board.
Use the new debugging IP address to connect the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

4.

Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.

Download and decompress the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.rar file from the release document. Obtain the Upgrade
Guide to OMU Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.

----End

9.14.4 Scenario: Replacing OMUa Boards with OMUc Boards


This section describes how to replace an OMUa board with an OMUc board.

Context
l

Replacing an OMU board will disconnect the OMU board from the host boards. System
operation data during this period will lose.

In this scenario, the operating system (OS) of the OMUc board is Dopra Linux OS after
the replacement no matter which OS is used by the board to be replaced because the OMUc
board can only support Dopra Linux OS.

When an OMUa board in single-OMU mode is damaged, two OMUc boards are
recommended to replace the OMUa board.

OMUc boards can be used to replace OMUa boards. The replacement scenarios are as follows:

Scenario: Replacing Two OMUa Boards with Two OMUc Boards


This section describes how to replace two OMUa boards with two OMUc boards.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

Two new OMUc boards are ready.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context
Mixedinsertion of OMU Boards
l

Short-term mixedinsertion of OMU boards is supported. When an OMUc board is used


to replace an OMUa board, the OMUc board and the OMUa board can be inserted into the
slots and co-exist for a short period, so that data can be transferred from the OMUa board
to the OMUc board.

Long-term mixedinsertion of OMU boards in slots is not supported because the active
and standby OMU boards must be of the same type for commercial delivery in existing
network, for example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or
OMUc boards.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP OMU command to query information about the OMU and record the queried
information in Records of the product software Installation Information.
Record Sheet of OMU Software Installation Information of the OMU board to be replaced
records the following information:
l Administrator password
l Password of system administrator admin
l Password of FTP user FtpUsr
l External fixed IP address, external virtual IP address, internal fixed IP address, internal virtual
IP address, debugging IP address, and backup channel IP address of the OMU board
NOTE

This document uses the OMUa board as an example.

Step 2 Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU operating system
(OS).
1.

Log in to the standby OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the OMU in the
BSC6900 UMTS OMU Administration Guide.

2.

Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to stop the omud process.

3.

Run the poweroff command to shut down the OMU OS.

Step 3 Remove the standby OMU board. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU board that
is equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with old
ejector levers.
Step 4 Install the OMUc boards in the active and standby slots of the board. These slots are green in
Figure 9-20.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

The OMUa board is twice the thickness of other boards. Two OMUa boards are installed in the
slots in blue, yellow, and red frames, as shown in Figure 9-20. Between two adjacent OMUa
boards, one is active and the other is standby.
The first OMUc board used for replacement must be installed in the green slots.
Example 1: Two OMUa boards are installed in the slots 20 through 23 before replacement. Slots
20 and 21 house the active OMUa board. Slots 22 and 23 house the standby OMUa board.
Perform the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1.

Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 22 and 23.

2.

Install the first OMUc board in slot 23.

Example 2: Two OMUa boards are installed in the slots 20 through 23 before replacement. Slots
20 and 21 house the standby OMUa board. Slots 22 and 23 house the active OMUa board.
Perform the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1.

Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 20 and 21.

2.

Install the first OMUc board in slot 21.

Figure 9-20 Slots housing the first OMUc board

Step 5 Connect the PC and the ETH2 port on the OMUc board using the network cable.
Step 6 Set the IP address of the PC to be on the same network segment with the ETH2 port. The initial
IP address of the ETH2 port is 192.168.6.50 or 192.168.6.60, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Step 7 Uploading the OMU application installation package to the OMU. For details, see Uploading
the Product Software Installation Package to the OMU in the BSC6900 UMTS OMU
Administration Guide.
Step 8 Logging in to the OMU.
1.

Run the SSH terminal, for example, PuTTY, on the PC, and type the debugging IP address
of the OMU.

2.

Logging in to the OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the OMU in the BSC6900
UMTS OMU Administration Guide.

Step 9 Installing the product software in the active workspace.


1.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Navigate to the directory where the OMU application installation package is saved.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Assume that the product software installation package install_bam.sh is saved in /mbsc/
upgrade/V***R***C**/install/setup. Enter the following command:
cd /mbsc/upgrade/V***R***C**/install/setup

2.

Enter chmod +x ./install_bam.sh to obtain the permission to run ./install_bam.sh.

3.

Enter ./install_bam.sh.

4.

The system prompts you to type the product running mode. Type the product running mode
and press Enter.
[2011-05-03 10:12:32] software integrality verify begin...
[2011-05-03 10:12:42] software integrality verify end...
# The run mode of the product
# GO:GSM only
# UO:UMTS only
# GU:GSM and UMTS
# Please select one mode to install.
Please input a valid run_mode :

5.

The system prompts you to type the office name. Type the office name and press Enter.
# The name of office
# The name suggest range from 5 to 32 characters.
# The characters suggest be letters, digits, "-"or "_".
Please input a valid office_name :

6.

The system prompts you to type the language version. Type the language version and press
Enter.
# The OMU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

7.

The system prompts you to type the admin password. Type the admin password, confirm
it, and press Enter.
# The "admin" user's password of OMU service.
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()_+{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase letter,digit
or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change the password later, but this password should be provided
first.
Please input a valid admin_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

8.

The system prompts you to type the FTP password. Type the FTP password, confirm it,
and press Enter.
# The ftp user's password of OMU service
# The password must range from 8 to 32(characters).The characters must be
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, or special characters.
Special characters include spaces and the following characters:~!@#$%^&*()_+{}|[]:<>?./
The password must consist of 2 types of uppercase letter,lowercase letter,digit
or special character at least.
# Do not forget the password.
# You can change it later, but this password should be provided first.
Please input a valid ftp_password :
Please input a valid Confirm password :

9.

Type the external virtual IP address or a valid external virtual configuration based on the
displayed message.
Example for entering the external virtual IP address:

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

# The extranet virtual IP.


Please input a valid virtual_extranet_ip :

Example for entering the external virtual configuration:


# The extranet IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
# example: 192.168.1.9/255.255.255.0;192.168.1.1
Please input a valid virtual_extranet_config :
NOTE

External network virtual IP uses the saved former information of standby OMUa board. After the
product software are installed, you can change the IP addresses and subnet masks of the OMU
Ethernet adapters with omutool.

10. Type Dual, and press Enter.


11. The system asks you whether to continue with the installation, as shown:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

12. Type Y to install product software. When the message Install OMU succeed! is
displayed, product software are successfully installed.
Step 10 Change IP addresses of OMU Ethernet adapters and their subnet masks
Perform either of the following operation to change IP addresses of the new OMU:
l Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can be performed only if the local
commissioning network adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about this operation,
see the description of the MOD OMUIP command in the MML command reference.
l Use the omutool to change IP addresses of the OMU. For details, see the following steps.
1.

Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the


directory containing omutool.

2.

Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses of the replaced OMU
board.
l Execute ./omutool innercard IP address to change the internal fixed IP address.
l Execute ./omutool innervip IP address to change the internal virtual IP address.
l Execute ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) to change the external fixed
IP address and subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omuc IP address to change the backup
channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet
adapter on an OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omua IP address to change the backup
channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet
adapter on an OMUc board.
l Record the information about the product software installation in Information Records
of OMU Software Installation.
NOTE

It is recommended that the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet
adapter B_UPDATE0 of the OMUc board be set to 192.168.9.60. In addition, set the backup channel IP
addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE1 to the backup channel
IP address of the OMUa board that has been removed in Records of the OMU Application Installation
Information.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 11 Record the information about the product software installation in Information Records of OMU
Software Installation.
Step 12 Start the omud on the standby OMU board. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press
Enter to start the omud.
Step 13 Wait 10 minutes while the data of OMUa board and the OMUc board is being synchronized.
After the OMU OS, product software and patches are installed, the data of the OMUa board and
the OMUc board is synchronized automatically.
Step 14 Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync
state is Data synchronization is successful, run the SWP OMU command to switch the OMUc
to work as the active OMU.
Step 15 After the active/standby OMU switchover is complete, run the DSP OMU command to check
the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync state is Data synchronization is
successful, stop the OMUd process on the OMUa board, shut down the OMU OS, referring to
Step 2.
Step 16 Repeat Step 3 to Step 4 to remove the OMUa board, and install OMUc board.
NOTE

The OMUc boards can be configured in slots 0 and 1, 2 and 3, 20 and 21, 22 and 23, 24 and 25, or 26 and
27. For example, if one OMUc board is configured in slot 21, the other OMUc board must be configured
in slot 20.

Step 17 Repeat operations in Step 5 to Step 9 to install product software.


Step 18 Change IP addresses of OMU Ethernet adapters and their subnet masks by referring to operations
in Step 10.
NOTE

It is recommended that the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter
B_UPDATE0 of the OMUc board be set to 192.168.9.50. In addition, set the backup channel IP addresses of
the active and standby OMUs on the Ethernet adapter B_UPDATE1 to the backup channel IP address of the
OMUa board that has been removed in Records of the OMU Application Installation Information.

Step 19 Start the omud on the standby OMU board. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press
Enter to start the omud.
Step 20 Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
Step 21 Run the RMV BRD command to delete the OMUa boards which have been removed in Step
16.
Step 22 Run the ADD BRD command to add the OMUc board which has been installed in Step 16.
Step 23 Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When Data-sync
state is Data synchronization is successful, go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing
OMU Board.
----End

Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with Two OMUc Boards


This section describes how to replace an OMUa board with two OMUc boards.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

Two new OMUc boards are ready.

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Flash Drive. The operation type is set to Install and product software and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance
(O&M), obtain the latest backup data for restoring the data on the new OMU board.
Mixedinsertion of OMU Boards
l

Short-term mixedinsertion of OMU boards is supported. When an OMUc board is used


to replace an OMUa board, the OMUc board and the OMUa board can be inserted into the
slots and co-exist for a short period, so that data can be transferred from the OMUa board
to the OMUc board.

Long-term mixedinsertion of OMU boards in slots is not supported because the active
and standby OMU boards must be of the same type for commercial delivery in existing
network, for example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or
OMUc boards.

Two solutions can be adopted for the OMU replacement in terms of synchronizing data during
the replacement:
l

Solution 1: When slots beside the OMUa board in single-OMU mode are empty and
available, the OMUa board can be replaced by the OMUc board through short-term mixed
insertion of OMU boards.

Solution 2: When slots beside the OMUa board in single-OMU mode are not empty and
available, the data of the OMUa board can be copied onto the OMUc board to complete
replacement.

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
l

Check whether slots beside the OMUa board are empty and available for installing the
OMUc board.
The OMUa board is twice the thickness of other OMU boards. Two OMUa boards are
installed in the slots in blue, yellow, and red frames, as shown in Figure 9-21. Between
two adjacent OMUa boards, one is active and the other is standby.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

The first OMUc board used for replacement must be installed in the green slots in the blue,
yellow, and red frames.
Example 1: An OMUa board is installed in the slots 20 and 21 before replacement.
Replacing operations are as follows:
1.

Install the first OMUc board in slot 23.

2.

Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 20 and 21.

3.

Install the second OMUc board in slot 22.

Example 2: An OMUa board is installed in the slots 22 and 23 before replacement. Perform
the following operations to replace OMU boards:
1.

Install the first OMUc board in slot 21.

2.

Remove the OMUa board installed in slots 22 and 23.

3.

Install the second OMUc board in slot 20.

Figure 9-21 Slots housing the first OMUc board

If...

Then...

Slots beside the OMUa board are empty


and available for installing the OMUc
board

Start Replacement Through CoExistence of OMU Boards.

Slots beside the OMUa are not available


for installing the OMUc board

Start Replacement by Copying Data of


OMU boards.

Replacement Through mixedinsertion of OMU Boards


1.

Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to
appropriate values to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU
hard disk.

2.

Change the OMU working mode to dual-OMU mode.


a.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Log in to the active and standby OMU. For detailed operations, see Logging In
to the OMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

b.

Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to stop the omud process.

c.

Enter cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press Enter to


navigate to the directory that contains the omutool process.

d.

Run the ./omutool dualmode dual command to set the OMU working mode to
dual-OMU.

e.

Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.

3.

In five minutes after the OMU board operating before replacement is started, run the
DSP OMU command. When the Operational state is Active normal, install the first
OMUc board in the slot shown in Figure 9-21.

4.

Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
NOTE

The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

5.

Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status by referring to Table 9-18.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status by referring to Table 9-19.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For details about the time needed for the OMU operating system installation, see Table 1 in Preparing
a USB Flash Drive.

Table 9-18 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU
operating system installation
Board

During
Installation

Successful
Installation

Failed
Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-19 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating
system and product software installation
Board

During
Installation

Successful
Installation

Failed
Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The RUN
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or
off.

l The ALM
indicator
blinks.

l The ACT
indicator
blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or
off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

6.

Adjust all the IP addresses and masks on the standby OMU board and ensure there is
no conflict between the internal network fixed IP addresses, the external network fixed
IP addresses, and the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMU
boards.
Perform either of the following operation to change IP addresses of the new OMU:
Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can be performed only if the
local commissioning network adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about
this operation, see the description of the MOD OMUIP command in the MML
command reference.
Use the omutool to change IP addresses of the OMU. For details, see Changing
the IP Addresses and Masks for the new OMU Boards.

7.

Wait 10 minutes while the data of OMUa board and the OMUc board is being
synchronized.
After the OMU OS, product software and patches are installed, the data of the
OMUa board and the OMUc board is synchronized automatically.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

8.

Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, run the SWP OMU command
to swap the OMU boards.

9.

Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, stop the omud process on the
OMUa board according to the OS type of the OMUa board, and shut down the OMU
OS by following operations.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The SUSE Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS


is used

1. Log in to the active and standby


OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging In to the OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop
command to stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut
down the OMU OS.

The Windows OS is used

1. Log in to the active and standby


OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging In to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand
then press Enter. The OMU
command interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to
stop the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list
box to shut down the OMU OS.

10. Remove the standby OMUa board. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU
board that is equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that
is equipped with old ejector levers.
11. Install the second OMUc board in the active and standby slots of the first OMUc board.
These slots are the green slots shown in Figure 9-22.
The green slots in Figure 9-22 are the slots for housing the second OMUc board.
Figure 9-22 Slots housing the second OMUc board

12. Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

13. Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
14. Adjust all the IP addresses and masks on the standby OMU board and ensure there is
no conflict between the internal network fixed IP addresses, the external network fixed
IP addresses, and the backup channel IP addresses of the active and standby OMU
boards. All these IP addresses meet the requirements for planning IP addresses. For
details about how to adjust IP addresses, see Changing the IP Addresses and Masks
for the new OMU Boards.
15. Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
16. Run the RMV BRD command to remove an OMUa board.
17. Run the ADD BRD command to add an OMUc board.
18. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, start 9.14.6 Common
Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
l

Replacement by Copying Data of OMU Boards


1.

Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to
appropriate values to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU
hard disk.

2.

Save the performance configuration file, SSL license file, and OMU system data to
the local PC.
a.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, see Starting the file
manager on the LMT.

b.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click


Download.
NOTE

Run the LST OMUAREA command to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that the OMU
active workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas directory.
Only DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l License files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\license directory.

3.

Optional: Apply for a digital certificate.

4.

Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU OS.
If...

Then...

The SUSE Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS


is used

1. Log in to the active and standby


OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging In to the OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop
command to stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut
down the OMU OS.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The Windows OS is used

1. Log in to the active and standby


OMU. For detailed operations, see
Logging In to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand
then press Enter. The OMU
command interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to
stop the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list
box to shut down the OMU OS.

5.

Remove the OMU board to be replaced. For detailed operations, see Replacing an
OMU board that is equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board
that is equipped with old ejector levers.

6.

Insert the two prepared USB flash drives into a USB port on two new OMU board
panels, respectively.

7.

Install the two new OMU boards in the slots for the active and standby OMUc boards.
NOTE

The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

8.

Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating
system. Check the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether
the OMU operating system is installed successfully.
If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 9-18.
If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the
indicator status. See Table 9-19.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When
this occurs, prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash
drive to a new USB flash drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For details about the time needed for the OMU operating system installation, see Table 1 in Preparing
a USB Flash Drive.

9.

Log in to the LMT and start the file manager.

10. Select the target file on the local PC and click Upload to upload Step 1 or the most
recently saved OMU data to the active workspace on the OMU hard disk. Ensure that
the upload path is the same as the backup download path.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming
that the active workspace is version_a:
Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.


11. Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed
operations, see Logging In to the OMU.
12. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.
13. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to
the directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
14. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the
omu_backup_linker tool.
15. A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type
restore and press Enter.
16. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file
pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter.
The system starts to restore data. A message will be displayed showing success or
failure, for example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
17. Enter /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process on the standby
OMUc board.
18. Run the DSP OMU command in five minutes after the database is restored and the
OMUc board is started. When Operational state is Active normal, log in to the
second OMUc board, enter /etc/rc.d/omud start, and press Enter to start the omud
process of the second OMUc board.
19. Wait 10 minutes while the data of two OMUc boards is being synchronized.
20. Run the DSP OMU command to check the data synchronization progress. When
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is successful, start 9.14.6 Common
Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End

Scenario: Replacing an OMUa Board with an OMUc Board


This section describes how to replace an OMUa board with an OMUc board.

Prerequisites
l

You have logged in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging
Out of the LMT.

Two new OMUc boards are ready.

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Flash Drive. The operation type is set to Install and product software and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Context
If the OMU board to be replaced is faulty and cannot undergo operation and maintenance
(O&M), obtain the latest backup data for restoring the data on the new OMU board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BKP DB command with Path of Backup File and File Name set to appropriate values
to back up data and save it in the specified directory in the OMU hard disk.
Step 2 Save the performance configuration file, SSL license file, and OMU system data to the local PC.
1.

Start the file manager on the LMT. For detailed operations, see Starting the file manager
on the LMT.

2.

Select the files to be downloaded in the corresponding directories and click Download.
NOTE

Run the LST OMUAREA command to query the OMU active workspace. Assuming that the OMU active
workspace is version_a:
l Performance configuration files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\DefaultMeas directory. Only
DefaultMeas_Active.xml and DefaultMeas_Standby.xml need to be backed up.
l SSL certificate files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\cert directory.
l License files are saved in the \bam\version_a\ftp\license directory.

Step 3 Stop the omud process on the standby OMU board and shut down the OMU operating system
(OS).
If...

Then...

The SUSE Linux OS or Dopra Linux OS is


used

1. Log in to the active and standby OMU. For


detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command to
stop the omud process.
3. Run the poweroff command to shut down
the OMU OS.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The Windows OS is used

1. Log in to the active and standby OMU. For


detailed operations, see Logging In to the
OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, Enter cmdand then
press Enter. The OMU command
interface is displayed.
3. Run the net stop omud command to stop
the omud process.
4. Choose Start > Shutdown. Select
Shutdown from the drop-down list box to
shut down the OMU OS.

Step 4 Remove the OMU board to be replaced. For detailed operations, see Replacing an OMU board
that is equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with
old ejector levers.
Step 5 Insert the prepared USB installation disk into any USB port on the OMU panel.
Step 6 Inset the new OMU board in the slots where the OMUa board is installed.
NOTE

The OMUc board is set to boot from the USB port by default at delivery.
After the OMU board restarts, it automatically installs OS and software.

Step 7 Wait 1 to 2 minutes and then use the USB flash drive to install the OMU operating system. Check
the status of indicators on the OMU board panel to determine whether the OMU operating system
is installed successfully.
l If only the operating system is to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator status. See
Table 9-20.
l If the operating system and applications are to be installed on the OMU, check the indicator
status. See Table 9-21.
NOTE

If the status of the indicators differs from this, the OMU cannot identify the USB flash drive. When this occurs,
prepare another USB flash drive. Alternatively, copy the data in the original USB flash drive to a new USB flash
drive, and then reinstall the OMU operating system.
For details about the time needed for the OMU operating system installation, see Table 1 in Preparing a USB
Flash Drive.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-20 Status of the indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system
installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

l The OFFLINE
indicator blinks.

Table 9-21 Status of indicators on the OMU board panel during the OMU operating system and
product software installation
Board

Installation
Procedure

Successful
Installation

Failed Installation

OMUc

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The RUN
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ALM
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ALM
indicator blinks.

l The ACT
indicator blinks.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The ACT
indicator is
steady on or off.

l The ACT
indicator is off.
l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

l The OFFLINE
indicator is off.

Step 8 Log in to the LMT and start the file manager.


Step 9 Select the target file on the local PC and click Upload to upload Step 2 or the most recently
saved OMU data to the active workspace on the OMU hard disk. Ensure that the upload path is
the same as the backup download path.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming that the
active workspace is version_a:
l Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.
Step 10 Log in to the OMU using the external network fixed IP address. For detailed operations, see
Logging In to the OMU.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 11 Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop the omud process.
Step 12 Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press Enter to navigate to the
directory containing the omu_backup_linker tool.
Step 13 Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to start the omu_backup_linker tool.
Step 14 A message is displayed "Please input a valid bkp_res_type :." Type restore
and press Enter.
Step 15 A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup file pathname : ."
Type the backup file save path and the file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore
data. A message will be displayed showing success or failure, for example, "Restore OMU
database succeed!" may be displayed.
Step 16 Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start the omud process.
Step 17 Start 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.
----End

9.14.5 Scenario: Replacing Active and Standby OMUs in DualOMU Mode


This section describes how to replace the active and standby OMUs when two OMUs are
configured in active/standby mode on BSC6900. In this scenario, OMU operation and
maintenance of the host boards are interrupted.

Prerequisites
l

It is recommended that the new board be the same type as the boe\ard to be replaced.
NOTE

The OMUc board only runs the Dopra Linux OS.

A USB installation disk has been prepared. For detailed operations, see Preparing a USB
Flash Drive. The operation type is set to Install and product software and patches are
installed during the preparation.

Replace both the active and standby boards only when they are both faulty. Otherwise,
perform the operations described in 9.14.3 Scenario: Replacing the Standby OMU in
Dual-OMU Mode. If OMUc boards are used instead of OMUa boards, see Scenario:
Replacing Two OMUa Boards with Two OMUc Boards.

The new OMUs can use the same operating system as the OMUs to be replaced or use
another operating system, but the active and standby OMUs must use the same operating
system.

The new OMUs must be of the same type as the OMUs to be replaced.

When the new OMU board runs a different OS from that of the OMU board to be replaced,
it is recommended that you switch the OS of the new OMU board to that of the old OMU
board. This facilitates user operations.

Context

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
To protect the OMU board from the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), wear an ESD wrist strap
and insert its connector into the ESD socket on the cabinet before replacing the board. For
detailed operations, see 11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap. If an ESD wrist strap or ground
point is unavailable, wear a pair of ESD gloves instead.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the active and standby OMUs by referring to Replacing an OMU board that is
equipped with new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with old
ejector levers.
Step 2 Perform the following operations based on the operating system:
Option

Description

If the OMU operating 1. Connect two USB installation disks to any two USB ports on the
two new OMUs, respectively.
system is Dopra Linux
2. Install the new OMUs into the slots for the active and standby
OMUs.
3. After one or two minutes, the USB installation disks start
installation. Check the status of the indicators on the OMU panels
to determine whether installation is complete. For details about
indicator status, see Table 1 and Table 2 in Scenario: Old OMU
Board Running Dopra Linux and New OMU Board Running
SUSE Linux/Windows
4. Perform the following operations based on the USB installation
disk type:
l If the operation type of the installation disk is Install, perform
Step 5.
l If the installation type of the USB installation disks is
Switch, go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing
OMU Board without needing to restore OMU data.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

If the OMU operating 1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation
source for SUSE Linux. For details, see Preparations for
system is SUSE Linux
Reinstalling the OMU Operating System and Creating an
Installation Source for the Operating System.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on
each of the new OMUs.
3. Install a new OMU in the slot for the active OMU. For detailed
operations, see Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with
new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is
equipped with old ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install SUSE Linux. For details, see Installing
the OMU Operating System by Using the EasyInstall Software.
5. Repeat steps a through d to install another OMU into the slot for
the standby OMU and install SUSE Linux.
6. Install product software on the active and standby OMUs. For
details, see Install product software. in Scenario: Old OMU
Running SUSE Linux and New OMU Running Dopra
Linux.
If the OMU operating 1. On the local computer, use EasyInstall to prepare an installation
source for Windows. For details, see Preparations for Reinstalling
system is Windows
the OMU Operating System, Creating an Installation Source for
the Operating System and Creating an Installation Source for the
SetWin Software and OS Patches.
2. Connect the local computer to the debugging Ethernet port on
each of the new OMUs.
3. Install a new OMU in the slot for the active OMU. For detailed
operations, see Replacing an OMU board that is equipped with
new ejector levers or Replacing an OMU board that is
equipped with old ejector levers.
4. Use EasyInstall to install Windows. For details, see Installing the
OMU Operating System by Using the EasyInstall Software.
5. Repeat steps a through d to install another OMU into the slot for
the standby OMU and install SUSE Linux.
6. Install product software on the active and standby OMUs. For
details, see Install product software. in Scenario: Old OMU
Running Windows and New OMU Running Dopra Linux.
Step 3 Change the IP addresses of the new OMUs to those of the OMUs to be replaced.
Perform either of the following operation to change IP addresses of the new OMU:
l Run the MOD OMUIP command. This operation can be performed only if the local
commissioning network adapter is connected to the OMU. For details about this operation,
see the description of the MOD OMUIP command in the MML command reference.
l Use the omutool to change IP addresses of the OMU. For details, see the following steps.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

If the OMU operating 1. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam and press


Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.
system is Dopra Linux
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l Execute ./omutool innercard IP address to change the
internal fixed IP address.
l Execute ./omutool innervip IP address to change the internal
virtual IP address.
l Execute ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) to
change the external fixed IP address and subnet mask.
l Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway
IP address) to change the external virtual IP address and
subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to
change the backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an
OMUa board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omuc IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of the active
and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE0 Ethernet adapter on
an OMUc board.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard_for_omua IP
address to change the backup channel IP address of the active
and standby OMUs of the B_UPDATE1 Ethernet adapter on
an OMUc board.
l Execute ./omutool debugcard IP address to change the
commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start


the omud process.
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

If the OMU operating 1. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/version_a/


bin/bam and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
system is SUSE Linux
omutool.
2. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l Execute ./omutool innercard IP address to change the
internal fixed IP address.
l Execute ./omutool innervip IP address to change the internal
virtual IP address.
l Execute ./omutool extercard IP address mask (gateway) to
change the external fixed IP address and subnet mask.
l Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway
IP address) to change the external virtual IP address and
subnet mask.
l Use the command ./omutool backupcard IP address to
change the backup channel IP address of the active and standby
OMUs of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an
OMUa board.
l Execute ./omutool debugcard IP address to change the
commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

3. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start and press Enter to start


the omud process.
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

If the OMU operating 1. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU
command mode.
system is Windows
2. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\version_a\bin\bam and
press Enter to navigate to the directory containing omutool.
3. Change the OMU IP addresses by referring to the IP addresses
of the replaced OMU board.
l Execute omutool innercard IP address to change the internal
fixed IP address.
l Execute omutool innervip IP address to change the internal
virtual IP address.
l Execute omutool extercard IP address subnet mask (gateway
IP address) to change the external fixed IP address and subnet
mask.
l Execute ./omutool extervip IP address subnet mask (gateway
IP address) to change the external virtual IP address and
subnet mask.
l Use the command omutool backupcard IP address to change
the backup channel IP address of the active and standby OMUs
of the ETH3-UPDATE Ethernet adapter on an OMUa board.
l Execute omutool debugcard IP address to change the
commissioning IP address.
NOTE
Changing the debugging IP address immediately disconnects the LMT
PC from the OMU board. Use the new debugging IP address to connect
the LMT PC to the OMU board again.

4. Type the command net start omud to start the omud progress.
NOTE
After the IP address of the active OMU is set, log in to the standby OMU and
repeat the previous steps.

Step 4 Install the operating system patch and upgrade the Ethernet adapter drive as shown in Table
9-22.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-22 Criteria for operations (3)


If...

Then...

The OMU OS is Suse


Linux

Contact Huawei engineers to obtain the Hash value calculation tool


from http://support.huawei.com/carrier/#click=main3 and
enter SingleRAN_O&M tools in the search window. Then,
download the OMU Driver Upgrade CHS ***.rar and get
Upgrade Guide to OMU Linux Ethernet Adapter Driver and OMU
driver upgrade tool. Please refer to BSC6900 Upgrade Guide to
OMU O&M Panel Adapter Driver to upgrade the OMU adapter
driver.
NOTE
Suse Linux Operating System has no patch.

The OMU OS is
Windows

Download and decompress the Upgrade Guide to OMU


Windows Operating System and Ethernet Adapter Driver.
rar file from the release document. Decompress the package and
obtain the Upgrade Guide to OMU Windows Operating System
and Ethernet Adapter Driver.

Step 5 Remove the debugging Ethernet cable from the OMU board panel.
Step 6 Connect the LMT PC to the OMU external network.
Step 7 Download the latest backup data from the U2000 to the local computer For details, see Security
Management in U2000 Product Documentation.
Step 8 Log in to the LMT. For detailed operations, see Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT. On
the LMT, start the file manager. For detailed operations, see File Manager.
Step 9 Select the target file on the local computer and then click Upload file to upload the most recently
saved OMU data to the OMU hard disk. Ensure that the upload path is consistent with the
download path of the backup data and the data is uploaded to the active workspace.
Run the MML command LST OMUAREA to query the active workspace. Assuming that the
active workspace is version_a:
l Certificate files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\cert.
l License files are saved in \bam\version_a\ftp\license.
l OMU system data files are saved in \mbsc\bam\version_a\data\backup.
Step 10 Restore OMU data based on the operating system.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Option

Description

The OMU OS is
Dopra Linux

1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network


IP address. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop
the omud process.
3. Refer to Steps a and B to log in to the active OMU and end the
omud process.
4. Type the command cd /mbsc/bam/common/services and press
Enter to navigate to the directory containing the
omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup
file pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the
file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure, for
example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
8. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
active OMU.
9. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
10.Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
standby OMU.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

Option

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Description

The OMU OS is Suse 1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
Linux
2. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud stop and press Enter to stop
the omud process.
3. Refer to Steps a and B to log in to the active OMU and end the
omud process.
4. Type the command cd /BSC6000/data/mbsc/bam/common/
services and press Enter to navigate to the directory containing
the omu_backup_linker tool.
5. Type the command ./omu_backup_linker and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
6. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid backup
file pathname : ." Type the backup file save path and the
file name and press Enter. The system starts to restore data. A
message will be displayed showing success or failure, for
example, "Restore OMU database succeed!" may be
displayed.
8. Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
active OMU.
9. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
10.Type the command /etc/rc.d/omud start to start omud on the
standby OMU.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Option

Description

The OMU OS is
Windows

1. Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network


IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
2. Choose Start > Run, type cmd, and press Enter to enter the OMU
command mode.
3. Type the command net stop omud to stop the omud progress.
4. Refer to Steps a through c to log in to the active OMU and end
the omud process.
5. Type the command cd /d d:\mbsc\bam\common\services and
press Enter to navigate to the directory containing the
omu_backup_linker tool.
6. Type the command omu_backup_linker.exe and press Enter to
start the omu_backup_linker tool.
7. A message is displayed "Please input a valid
bkp_res_type :." Type restore and press Enter.
8. Type the backup file save path and the file name and press
Enter. The system starts to restore data. A message will be
displayed showing success or failure, for example, "Restore
OMU database succeed!" may be displayed.
9. Run net start omud to start omud on the active OMU.
10.Log in to the standby OMU by using the fixed external network
IP address. For details, refer to Logging In to the OMU.
11.Run net start omud to start omud on the standby OMU.

Step 11 Go to 9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board.


----End

9.14.6 Common Operation for Replacing OMU Board


This section describes the common operation after replacing OMU board, including querying
the OMU working status, modifying the name of the OMU, setting the time information of the
OMU, and setting the mode of the network adapter.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Apply for a digital certificate.
If the certificate is issued by Huawei, that is, Issuer in 1.2 contacts Huawei, a new certificate
is not required.
When the operation and maintenance channel of the BSC6900 enables the Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL), and uses equipment certificate not issued by Huawei, that is, Issuer in 1.2 does not contact
Huawei, the onsite engineer needs to determine whether to log out the equipment certificate of
the OMU board that has been replaced, and apply for a new one based on the certificate and the
equipment serial number (ESN) of the OMU board.
l If the ESN of the OMU board that has been replaced is the same with that in the equipment
certificate used by the NE, apply for a new certificate. For details, see "Certificate
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Application" in section "PKI Feature Parameter Description" of GBSS Feature


Documentation.
l If the ESN of the OMU board is different from that used by the NE, a new certificate is not
required, the original certificate can be continued to use.
1.

Run the MML command LST APPCERT to query the digital certificate of the current
OMU board.
To query the device certificate files being used by all applications, run the
following command:
LST APPCERT:;
%%LST APPCERT:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.
List Appcert
---------------Application Type

Certificate File Name

SSL
usercert.pem
(Number of results = 1)

---

2.

END

Run the MML command DSP APPCERT to query the ESN in Common Name of the
equipment.
If the Common Name is 1234.***, then the ESN is 1234.
To query the detailed information about a device certificate file for an
application (Application Type: SSL), run the following command:
DSP APPCERT: APPTYPE=SSL;
%%DSP APPCERT: APPTYPE=SSL;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded
Display Appcert
--------------Application Type = SSL
File Name = usercert.pem
Issuer = ***
Common Name = ***
Serial Number = 76:41:2d:00:1e:
25:60:8f:a6:d6:c2:e5:d1:33:81:75:55
Effective Date = 2012-03-21 06:55:48
Expiration Date = 2027-03-18 06:55:48
Status = Normal
(Number of results = 1)
---

3.

END

Run the MML command DSP ELABEL to query the ESN of the current OMU board.
In the example, BarCode is set to 210223880610B9000133, and this is the ESN of the
current OMU board.
To query the electronic label of the board (Subrack No. = 0; Device Type =
BOARD; Slot No. = 6), run the following type:
DSP ELABEL: SRN=0, DEVTYPE=BOARD, SN=6;
The result is as follows:
%%DSP ELABEL: SRN=0, DEVTYPE=BOARD, SN=6;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.
Electronic label information
----------------------------

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


Subrack No.
Slot No.
Electronic label information

=
=
=
=

0
6
/$[ArchivesInfo Version]
/$ArchivesInfoVersion=3.0

[Board Properties]
BoardType=WP11OMUa
BarCode=210223880610B9000133
Item=02238806
Description=PARC WP11OMUa Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:a
Manufactured=2009-03-16
VendorName=Huawei
IssueNumber=00
CLEICode=
BOM=
(Number of results = 1)

---

END

ESNs queried in 1.2 and 1.3 are different, a new certificate is not required.
Step 2 Optional: When the OMU runs the Dopra Linux operating system, set the OMU status to the
same status as that before the replacement based on the result recorded in Step 1 and Step 2.
For details, see Configuring OMU Route Forwarding and Disabling Root User Login to an OMU
Using SSH.
Step 3 Log in to the LMT by referring to Log in to the LMT.
Step 4 Run the MML command DSP OMU to query such information as OMU running status, fixed
IP addresses, virtual IP addresses, data synchronization state, internal network connection state,
external network connection state, and backup channel connection state.
If...

Then...

l One OMU board is


Perform operations described in Step 5.
configured and its
Operational state is Normal
l Two OMU boards are
configured and their
Operational state is Active
normal and Standby normal
respectively
Operational state is Fault

Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 5 Based on Data-sync state queried in Step 4, do as follows:

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Data-sync state is not Data synchronization Clear alarms by referring to


is successful
ALM-20701 OMU Failure Switchover
and ALM-20704 OMU Data
Synchronization Failure. Go to Step 6
after the alarms are cleared.
Data-sync state is Data synchronization is Perform operations described in Step
successful
6.
Step 6 Run the MML commands LST VER and LST PATCHVER to query whether the OMU
software version and patch version are correct.
If...

Then...

They are correct

Perform operations described in Step 7.

They are incorrect

Obtain the OMU version software and patch software


again and install them.

Step 7 Run the MML command DSP OMUMODULE to query the status of the OMU processes.
If...

Then...

State is Active or Stopped

l In dual-OMU mode, go to Step 8.


l In single-OMU mode, go to Step 9.

State is Abnormal

Contact Huawei technical support.

Step 8 (For OMU boards in dual-OMU mode only) Run the MML command CMP OMUDATA to
compare data about active and standby OMU boards. Check whether alarm data, performance
data, and configuration data are consistent between the active and standby OMU boards.
If...

Then...

The data is inconsistent

1. Run the MML command STR DATASYNC to start


data synchronization.
2. Perform operations described in Step 9.

The data is consistent

Perform operations described in Step 9.

Step 9 Run the MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the running license on host boards
is consistent with that on the OMU board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The licenses are inconsistent

1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20734


License Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 10.

The licenses are consistent

Perform operations described in Step 10.

Step 10 Run the MML command CMP BRDVER to check whether the running version on host boards
is consistent with that on the OMU board.
If...

Then...

The software versions are


inconsistent

1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20733


Software Version Inconsistency Between OMU and
Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 11.

The software versions are


consistent

Perform operations described in Step 11.

Step 11 Run the MML command ACT CRC to check whether the configuration data on host boards is
consistent with that on the OMU board.
If...

Then...

The configuration data is


inconsistent

1. Resolve the problem by referring to ALM-20736 Data


Inconsistency Between OMU and Host.
2. Perform operations described in Step 12.

The configuration data is


consistent

Perform operations described in Step 12.

Step 12 Run the MML command LST BRD to query Slot No. and Board Type of the OMU board.
If...

Then...

The board type is inconsistent 1. Run the MML command RMV BRD to remove
configurations of the replaced OMU board.
before and after the OMU board
replacement
2. Run the MML command ADD BRD to add
configurations of the new OMU board.
3. Perform operations described in Step 13.
The board type is consistent
Perform operations described in Step 13.
before and after the OMU board
replacement

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 13 Enter the command omutool computername OMU name to modify the name of the OMU, refer
to Changing a Computer Name.
Step 14 Run the MML command LST TZ to query time zone and daylight saving time of the OMU
board.
If...

Then...

The time zone and daylight


saving time of the OMU is
inconsistent with the local time

1. Run the MML command SET TZ to set the time


information of the OMU.

The time zone and daylight


saving time of the OMU is
consistent with the local time

Perform operations described in Step 15.

2. Perform operations described in Step 15.

Step 15 Run the MML command DSP TIME to query Time of the OMU board.
If...

Then...

The time of the OMU is


inconsistent with the local time

1. Run the MML command SET TIME to set the time


information of the OMU.
2. Perform operations described in Step 16.

The time of the OMU is


consistent with the local time

Perform operations described in Step 16.

Step 16 Set the working mode of ETH0 and ETH1 of the network adapter according to the router
connected to the OMU. For the detailed setting method, please refer to Setting the Link Mode
for External OMU Ethernet Adapters when the OS is Dopra. Refer to Setting the Link Mode of
the External OMU Ethernet Adapter when the OS is Windows. Normally the default value is
self-adaption. Set the OMU port as 100Mb/ Full Duplex only when the switchboard is forced to
be 100Mb/full duplex.
Step 17 View the device panel on the LMT and check the status of all devices.
If...

Then...

No abnormal device state is


introduced by the replacement

The replacement is complete.

An abnormal device state is


introduced by the replacement

Contact Huawei technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.15 Replacing a PAMU Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty PAMU board. The PAMU board is hot-swappable.
It takes about ten minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD
box or bag.

A new PAMU board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the status of the mute switch of the PAMU to be replaced.
For the position of the mute switch, see Panel of the PAMU Board.
Step 2 Set all bits of the DIP switch SW1 on the new PAMU to ON, as shown in Figure 9-23.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-23 Setting of the DIP switch on the PAMU

Step 3 Loosen the screws on the monitoring board panel of the power distribution box with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in Figure 9-24.
Figure 9-24 Removing the monitoring board panel of the power distribution box

1 Monitoring board panel of the power distribution box

2 M3 recessed pan head screw

3 PAMU board

Step 4 Hold the monitoring board panel and remove the board from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Loosen the screws fixing the monitoring board panel to the PAMU board with a Phillips
screwdriver and remove the PAMU. as shown in Figure 9-25.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-25 Removing the PAMU board

1 Monitoring board panel of the power distribution box

2 Pan head screw M3

3 PAMU board

Step 6 Put the PAMU board in the ESD box or bag.


Step 7 Fix the panel to the PAMU board and fasten the screws.
Step 8 Insert the new PAMU board along the guide rails.
Step 9 Fasten the screws fixing the monitoring board panel to the power distribution box.
Step 10 Observe the status of board indicators. If the new board automatically loads program and
configuration data, the RUN indicator blinks every other 0.125s.
For details about the states of the indicators on the board, see Panel of the PAMU Board.
NOTE

If the RUN indicator blinks every other 0.25s or the ALM indicator is steady ON, remove the PAMU and
install it again to ensure that the PAMU is in full contact with the backplane.

Step 11 Observe the status of board indicators. If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, the board
works properly.
Step 12 Set the mute switch on the new PAMU according to the recorded settings.
Step 13 Check whether alarms related to board faults are reported in the Browse Alarm window on the
LMT.
If there is an alarm, you can locate and clear the alarm according to the online alarm reference.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

You can obtain the bar code of the board on the PCB plate of the faulty board.

9.16 Replacing a PEUa/PEUc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty PEUa/PEUc board. The PEUa/PEUc board is hotswappable. It takes about eight minutes to replace a PEUa/PEUc board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

A new PEUa/PEUc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l Replacing the standby PEUa/PEUc has no adverse impact on the system. Replacing the
PEUa/PEUc board working in stand-alone mode, however, interrupts services carried on this
board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only a PEUa/PEUc board,
replacing the PEUa/PEUc board interrupts ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its
peer equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the PEUa/PEUc board to be
replaced.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup

Go to Step 3.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if boards in slots 14 and 15 do not work in
active/standby mode, they both work in stand-alone mode.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the status of board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

IPPATH status is AVAILABLE

1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP


path.
2. Go to Step 4.

IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 4.


Step 4 Check whether the labels on the E1/T1 cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
PEUa/PEUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Disconnect the clock cable. Loosen the captive screws from the E1/T1 cable connector with a
flat-head screwdriver and remove the E1/T1 cable.
Step 6 Remove the PEUa/PEUc board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 7 Check whether the settings of the DIP switches on the new board are correct by referring to DIP
Switches on the PEUa Board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The settings are correct

Go to Step 8.

The settings are incorrect

1. Set the DIP switches correctly.


2. Go to Step 8.

Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Connect the E1/T1 cable and clock cable by referring to the labels.
Step 10 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new
board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal

Go to Step 12.

The parameter is of any other values

Go to Step 11.

Step 11 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 10.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 12.


reported
Step 12 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 13.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 10.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 13 If the IP path is blocked in Step 3, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 14 directly.
Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.17 Replacing a POUa/POUc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty POUa/POUc board. The POUa/POUc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

A new POUa/POUc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l Replacing the standby POUa/POUc has no adverse impact on the system. Replacing the
POUa/POUc board working in stand-alone mode, however, interrupts services carried by the
subrack that houses the board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only a POUa/POUc board,
replacing the POUa/POUc board interrupts ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its
peer equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the POUa/POUc board to be
replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup

Go to Step 4 .

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if boards in slots 14 and 15 do not work in
active/standby mode, they both work in stand-alone mode.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the POUa/POUc board to be replaced.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board


over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The parameter is of any other values Go to Step 3.


Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the ports on the POUa/POUc
board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The ports are configured in independent Go to Step 4 .


mode
The ports are configured in active/
standby mode, and the ports are active

1. Run the DSP MSP command to query the


MSP status.
l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT
MSP command to activate the MSP.
l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.
2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch
the active port to standby status.
l If the active port is located in a slot with
an even number, set MSPCMD to MS
(Manual switchover from working link
to protection link).
l If the active port is located in a slot with
an odd number, set MSPCMD to LOP
(Lockout of Protection).
3. Go to Step 5.
NOTICE
Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local end
and the peer end have the same protection mode.

Go to Step 5.
The ports are configured in active/
standby mode, and the ports are standby
Step 4 Run the DSP IPPATH command to query the status of board to be replaced.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

IPPATH status is AVAILABLE

1. Run the BLK IPPATH command to block the IP


path.
2. Go to Step 5.

IPPATH status is UNAVAILABLE Go to Step 5.


Step 5 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
POUa/POUc are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after the board is replaced.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Check whether the settings of the DIP Switches on the POUa Board of the standby board are
correct.
NOTE

If the faulty board is POUc, checking the DIP switch is not required.

If...

Then...

The settings are correct

Go to Step 9.

The settings are incorrect

1. Set the DIP switches correctly.


2. Go to Step 9.

Step 9 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 10 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, install
the optical cables by referring to the labels.
Step 11 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 12 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status
of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal

Go to Step 14.

The parameter is of any other values

Go to Step 13.

Step 13 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 12.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 14.


reported
Step 14 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 15.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 12.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 15 If the IP path is blocked in Step 4, run the UBL IPPATH command to unblock the IP Path.
Otherwise, go to Step 16 directly.
Step 16 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.18 Replace an SAUa/SAUc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty SAUa/SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about 16 minutes to replace the SAUa/SAUc board.

Prerequisites
l

The tools used for replacing the SAUa/SAUc board are ready. The required tools are as
follows: ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box/bag.

You have prepared a new SAUa or SAUc board.

The SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced is disabled.

Context
The following items of the new SAUa/SAUc board must be consistent with those of the SAUa/
SAUc board to be replaced:
l

Password of the administrator of the operating system

Internal and external fixed IP addresses

PC name

NOTICE
Replacing the SAUa/SAUc board working in stand-alone mode will interrupt the communication
between the host boards and the SAUa/SAUc, which results in system data loss.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground core of the wrist strap to the ESD jack on the
cabinet.
Step 2 Remove the SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced.
1.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Loosen the captive screw on the SAUa/SAUc board counterclockwise with a screwdriver,
as shown in A of Figure 9-26.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-26 Uninstalling the SAUa/SAUc board

NOTE

The preceding figure takes an SAUa board as an example. The procedure for an SAUc board is
similar.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

2.

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Press and hold the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUc
board panel to unlock them, and rotate them outward. The SAUa/SAUc board is separated
from the backplane, as shown in part B of Figure 9-26.
NOTE

Turning outwards the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUc board gives a power-off sign to the SAUa/
SAUc board. The SAUa/SAUc board automatically shuts down the operating system and stops the
read/write operations on the hard disk. Then, the OFFLINE/OFL indicator on the SAUa/SAUc board
is steady on, indicating that the SAUa/SAUc board is powered off.

3.

Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if configured)
from the SAUa/SAUc board after the OFFLINE/OFL indicator blinks fast and then is steady
blue.

4.

Remove the SAUa/SAUc board to be replaced along the guide rail of the subrack, as shown
in C of Figure 9-26.

Step 3 Install the new SAUa/SAUc board.


1.

Press and hold the two locking buttons of the new board, flip outward the ejector levers to
separate them from the self-locking latch, and rotate them until they cannot be rotated, as
shown in part A of Figure 9-27.

2.

Slide the new SAUa/SAUc board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in B of
Figure 9-27.
Figure 9-27 Installing the SAUa/SAUc board

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules


NOTE

l The preceding figure takes an SAUa board as an example. The procedure for an SAUc board is
similar.
l The SAUa/SAUc is preferentially inserted into slots that meet the requirements. For details, see
SAUa Board or SAUc Board.

3.

Turn the ejector levers on the SAUa/SAUc board inwards until they are in position, as
shown in C of Figure 9-27.

4.

Tighten the captive screw clockwise with a screwdriver, as shown in D of Figure 9-27.
The new SAUa/SAUc board loads automatically and the RUN indicator blinks (0.125s on
and 0.125s off).

5.

Install the cables by referring to the labels.

Step 4 Install the SAU Software. Configure the PC name and IP addresses of the new SAUa/SAUc
board to ensure that they are the same as those of the replaced SAUa/SAUc board.
For details, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.
Step 5 Confirm that the SAUa/SAUc board works properly.
1.

2.

Run the DSP SAU command to query the status of the new SAUa/SAUc board when the
RUN indicator is blinking (1s on and 1s off).
If...

Then...

Operating Status is Active


Normal

Go to Step 5.3.

Other execution results are


displayed

Go to Step 5.2.

Check whether the alarms related board faults are displayed on the LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms related to board faults are


reported

1. Analyze the alarms according to the alarm


information, and then clear the alarms.
2. Go to Step 5.1.

Alarms related to board faults are


not displayed

3.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Go to Step 5.3.

Run the DSP SAUMODULE command to query the status of the SAU services.
If...

Then...

Status is Startup Type

The replacement is complete.

Status is Stopped

Restart the abnormal process. If the fault persists,


contact the Huawei technical support engineers.

Status is Abnormal

Contact Huawei technical support.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

----End

Follow-up Procedure
1.

Record the name of the site, slot, and board where the faulty board is located and the version
of the board.

2.

Check whether there is obvious physical damage to the board. For example, check whether
there are any deformed mechanical parts, burned components, distorted connectors, and
bent or broken-off pins.

3.

Record the fault cause, fault symptom, alarm name, status of indicators on the panel of the
board, and details of the procedures for locating and processing the faults on site.

4.

Put the board into the ESD bag and then put the bag together with the onsite fault record
into the board box. Keep the box properly.

5.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the faulty board.

9.19 Replacing an SCUa/SCUb Board


When an SCUa/SCUb board is faulty, you must replace it. The SCUa/SCUb board is hotswappable. The replacement scenarios include: replacing a SCUa board with another SCUa,
replacing a SCUa board with a SCUb board. It takes about 4 minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box
or bag, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

A new SCUa/SCUb board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
l Replacing the standby SCUa/SCUb board decreases the internal switching capacity but has
no impact on services.
l If no standby board is detected, replacing the SCUa/SCUb board in the MPS resets all boards
in the BSC6900 and interrupts all ongoing services in the BSC6900.
l If no standby board is detected, replacing the SCUa/SCUb board in the EPS resets all boards
in the subrack and interrupts all ongoing services. In addition, the communication between
the EPS and the MPS is interrupted.
l When an SCUa board is replaced by an SCUb board, it is recommended that SFP+ cables be
used to extend the inter-subrack bandwidth to 40 GHz. Otherwise, the inter-subrack
bandwidth is 4 GHz.

Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the SCUa/SCUb board in Device Panel on the LMT. Check the
configuration of the SCUa/SCUb board.
If...

Then...

Slots 6 and 7 are equipped with the SCUa/SCUb board

Go to Step 2.

Slot 6 or 7 is equipped with the SCUa/SCUb board

Go to Step 3.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal

1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch over


the board to the standby state.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example,
at midnight. This is because a forced switchover will
affect system running.

CPU status is a value other than


Active normal

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Modify the board setting.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Replacing a board with a board of the


Go to Step 4.
same hardware version (Including a SCUa
board is replaced by another SCUa board,
a SCUb board is replaced by another
SCUb board)
Replacing a board with a board of a later Contact Huawei engineers.
hardware version (A SCUa board is
NOTE
replaced by a SCUb board)
Replacing an SCUa board with an SCUb board
involves complex operations, including setting the
configuration mode of subracks to the ineffective
mode and specifying the status of ports on the SCUb
board. Therefore, the replacement must be
implemented by Huawei engineers.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the cables connected to the SCUa/SCUb board are legible. If the
labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid improper connection after the board
is replaced.
Step 5 Disconnect the cables from the faulty board.
Step 6 Remove the faulty SCUa/SCUb board from the subrack by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a
Board.
Step 7 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
If...

Then...

Replacing a board with a board of Go to Step 8.


the same hardware version
NOTE
(Including a SCUa board is replaced The new board automatically loads program and
by another SCUa board, a SCUb
configuration data, and the RUN indicator blinks (0.125s on
board is replaced by another SCUb
and 0.125s off).
board)
Replacing a board with a board of a l Run the SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE
later hardware version (A SCUa
command to set the configuration mode of all
board is replaced by a SCUb board)
subracks to the ineffective mode.
l Run the RST BSC command to set all subracks of
the BSC.
l Go to Step 8.
Step 8 Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 9 If the RUN indicator blinks (1s on and 1s off), run the DSP BRD command to query the status
of the new board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Only one SCUa/SCUb board is configured, and the CPU status


parameter is set to is Active normal

Go to Step 11.

Two SCUa/SCUb boards are configured, and the CPU status


parameter is set to is Standby normal

Go to Step 11.

The CPU status parameter is a value other than Active normal and Go to Step 10.
Standby normal
Step 10 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Analyze and clear the alarm according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 9.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 11.


reported
Step 11 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version complies with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 12.

The board version does not comply with 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
the board version matching table
\fam on the OMU board are correct. If the
files are incorrect, contact Huawei engineers
for the correct files.
2. Run the RST BRD command to reset the
board.
3. Go to Step 9.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 12 Verify whether this board is functioning properly by testing CS services with dialing and PS
services with web browsing.
----End
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.20 Replacing a UOIa/UOIc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty UOIa/UOIc board. The UOIa/UOIc board is hot
swappable. It takes about five minutes to replace the board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box
or bag, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

A new UOIa/UOIc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
l Replacing the standby UOIa/UOIc board has no adverse impact on the system. When no
standby UOIa/UOIc board is in position, replacing the board interrupts services carried on
this board.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only a UOIa/UOIc board,
replacing the UOIa/UOIc board interrupts ongoing services between the BSC6900 and its
peer equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST SUBRACK command to query the backup status of the UOIa/UOIc board to be
replaced.
If...

Then...

Backup type is Backup

Go to Step 2.

Backup type is No backup

Go to Step 4.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if boards in slots 14 and 15 do not work in
active/standby mode, they both work in stand-alone mode.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal 1. Run the SWP BRD command to switch the board
over to standby status.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The CPU is in another status

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Run the DSP OPT command to query the backup status of all the optical ports on the UOIa/
UOIc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The optical port is standby Go to Step 4.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The optical port is active

1. Run the DSP MSP command to query the MSP status.


l If the MSP is not started, run the ACT MSP command
to activate the MSP.
l If the MSP has been started, go to 3.2.
2. Run the SET MSPCMD command to switch the active port
to standby status.
l If the active port is located in a slot with an even number,
set MSPCMD to MS(Manual switchover from
working link to protection link).
l If the active port is located in a slot with an odd number,
set MSPCMD to LOP(Lockout of Protection).
3. Go to Step 4.
NOTICE
Before activating the MSP, ensure that the local end and the peer end
have the same protection mode.

Step 4 Check whether the labels on the optical cable and clock cable (if configured) connected to the
UOIa/UOIc board are legible. If the labels are illegible, attach a new label to the cables to avoid
improper connection after the board is replaced.
Step 5 Remove the clock cable.
Step 6 Remove the optical cables and cap the connectors. If the connectors are dirty, clean them with
the dustfree cloth or the fiber cleaner.
Step 7 Remove the board by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board and cap the optical ports.
Step 8 Install the new board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 9 Remove the caps from optical ports and connectors, and reserve them for later use. Then, connect
the optical cable by referring to the labels.
Step 10 Install the clock cable (if configured) by referring to the labels.
Step 11 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run the DSP BRD command to query the status
of the new board.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal or Standby normal

Go to Step 13.

The CPU is in another status

Go to Step 12.

Step 12 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 11.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 13.


reported
Step 13 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 14.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 11.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 14 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.21 Replacing an SPUa Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty SPUa board. The SPUa board is hot-swappable.
It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box
or bag, and dustfree cloth.

A new SPUa board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l Replacing the standby main control SPUa board has no adverse impact on the services in the
system. Replacing the main control SPUa board working in stand-alone mode, however,
interrupts services carried on the subrack.
l Replacing the standby non main control SPUa board has no adverse impact on the services
in the system. Replacing the non main control SPUa board working in stand-alone mode,
however, interrupts services carried on the board.

Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the SPUa board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check the
configuration of the SPUa board.
If...

Then...

The SPUa board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode

Go to Step 2.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The SPUa board to be replaced does not work in the active/standby mode Go to Step 3.

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 2 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 3 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the SPUa board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is set to Active normal 1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to
standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at
midnight.

The CPU is in another status

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Remove the SPUa board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 4 Insert the new SPUa board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 5 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new
board.
If...

Then...

The SPUa board to be replaced does not work in the active/standby mode, Go to Step 7.
CPU status is Active normal
The SPUa board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode, CPU
status is Standby normal

Go to Step 7.

The CPU is in another status

Go to Step 6.

Step 6 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 5.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 7.


reported
Step 7 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 8.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 5.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 8 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.22 Replacing an SPUb/SPUc Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty SPUb/SPUc board. The SPUb/SPUcc board is
hot-swappable. It takes about six minutes to replace and load a board.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box
or bag, and dustfree cloth.

A new SPUb/SPUc board is ready.

The LMT is started and communicates with the OMU properly.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l Replacing the standby main control SPUb/SPUc board has no adverse impact on the services
in the system. Replacing the main control SPUb/SPUc board working in stand-alone mode,
however, interrupts services carried on the subrack.
l Replacing the standby non main control SPUb/SPUc board has no adverse impact on the
services in the system. Replacing the non main control SPUb/SPUc board working in standalone mode, however, interrupts services carried on the board.

Procedure
Step 1 Display the subrack that houses the SPUb/SPUc board in the Device Panel on the LMT. Check
the configuration of the SPUb/SPUc board.
If...

Then...

The SPUb/SPUc board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode

Go to Step 2.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The SPUb/SPUc board to be replaced does not work in the active/standby Go to Step 3.
mode

NOTE

If two BSC6900 boards work in backup mode, the boards must be installed in an even-numbered slot and
in the slot numbered with the slot No. plus 1. For example, if the board that is installed in slot 2 does not
work in backup mode, the board that is installed in slot 3 does not work in backup mode either.

Step 2 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of the SPUb/SPUc board to be replaced.
If...

Then...

CPU status is Active normal 1. Run SWP BRD to switch the board over to standby.
2. Go to Step 3.
NOTICE
Run this command when traffic is light, for example, at midnight.

The CPU is in another status

Go to Step 3.

Step 3 Optional: Modify the board setting.


If...

Then...

Replacing a board with a board of the same Go to Step 4.


hardware version (Including a SPUc
board is replaced by another SPUb board,
a SPUb board is replaced by another SPUb
board)
Replacing a board with a board of a later l Run the MOD BRD command on the LMT
hardware version (Including a SPUb
to modify board settings.
board is replaced by a SPUc board, a SPUc
l Go to Step 4.
board is replaced by a SPUb board)
Step 4 Remove the SPUb/SPUc board to be replaced by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board.
Step 5 Insert the new SPUb/SPUc board into the subrack by referring to 9.2.4 Installing a board.
The new board automatically loads program and configuration data, and the RUN indicator
blinks every other 0.125s.
Step 6 If the RUN indicator blinks every other second, run DSP BRD to query the status of the new
board.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

If...

Then...

The SPUb/SPUc board to be replaced does not work in the active/standby Go to Step 8.
mode, CPU status is Active normal
The SPUb/SPUc board to be replaced works in the active/standby mode, Go to Step 8.
CPU status is Standby normal
The CPU is in another status

Go to Step 7.

Step 7 Check whether a board failure alarm is reported on the BSC6900 LMT.
If...

Then...

Alarms caused by a faulty board are


reported

1. Locate and rectify the fault according to the


alarm help information.
2. Go to Step 6.

No alarms caused by the faulty board are Go to Step 8.


reported
Step 8 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether the software version of the new board is
consistent with the board version matching table.
If...

Then...

The board version is consistent with the


board version matching table

Go to Step 9.

The board version is inconsistent with the 1. Ensure that the program files of the board in
the OMU active workspace installation\bin
board version matching table
\fam on the OMU are correct. If the program
files are incorrect, contact Huawei
engineers.
2. Run RST BRD to reset the board.
3. Go to Step 6.

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version matching table from the version matching documents.

Step 9 Verify this board is functioning correctly by testing the CS services with dialing and PS services
with web browsing.
----End

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Follow-up Procedure
Record the name and the bar code of the replaced board. Check whether there are obvious
physical damages, such as the distorted pin, broken pin, or burnt board. If there is any damage,
fill in BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form and pack the replaced board. When packing
a board, pay attention to the following points:
l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

Ensure that each ESD bag or case holds only one board.

When packing multiple boards, isolate them with ESD materials.

Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced board.


NOTE

You may obtain the name and the PCB version from the panel or bottom of the faulty board.

9.23 Replacing a Subrack


This section describes how to replace a faulty BSC6900 subrack. After powering off a subrack,
60 minutes is required for the replacement before a new subrack starts working properly.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a socket wrench, a Phillips
screwdriver, a flat-head screwdriver, diagonal pliers, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

A new subrack is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

NOTICE
l Replacing a subrack interrupts services carried on the boards in the subrack.
l Replace a subrack with caution quickly when traffic is light, for example, in the early
morning.
l A subrack is fairly heavy. For safety purposes, a 3-person group is recommended when
replacing the subrack.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the labels on the cables are legible. If the labels are illegible, relabel the cables
to avoid improper connection after the subrack is replaced.
Step 2 Record the installation positions of boards in the subrack and the DIP switch of the subrack.
Step 3 Check the types of the subrack to be replaced, and perform the related operations shown in the
following table:
If...

Then...

The subrack is an EPS subrack Turn off the power switch for the subrack to be replaced.
The subrack is an MPS

1. Raise the ejector levers of the OMUa/OMUc board, as


shown in part B of Removing the OMUa/OMUc
board. Repeat this step if there are two boards.
2. Turn off the power switch for the subrack after the
OFFLINE indicator on the OMUa/OMUc board is
steady on.

NOTE

Assign switches for BSC6900 cabinets by referring to labels on the front panel of the power distribution
box. For details, see 6.1 Distribution of Power Switches.

Step 4 Remove the cables connected to the subrack.


Step 5 Remove boards from the subrack in sequence by referring to 9.2.1 Removing a Board. Then,
put them in ESD boxes or ESD bags.
Step 6 Remove the eight captive screws fixing the subrack on the cabinet from the front of the cabinet
using the Phillips screwdriver and reserve them for later use. Four captive screws are on the left
side and the other are on the right side.
Step 7 One person pushes the subrack out along the guide rail from the back of the cabinet. The other
two persons hold the subrack by the mounting ears and support the base of the subrack. Pull out
the subrack from the cabinet.
Step 8 Two persons hold the mounting ears and support the base of a new subrack. Slide the subrack
along the guiding rail into the cabinet. Then, fasten the screws to fix the subrack.
Step 9 Set the DIP switches of the new subrack by referring to the DIP switching setting on the removed
subrack. For details on how to verify and set the DIP switches on BSC6900 subracks, see DIP
Switch on a Subrack.
Step 10 Install the power cables for the new subrack:
1.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Take off the cover of the power cable connection box and remove the screws in the power
ports, as shown in Figure 9-28.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Figure 9-28 Power cable connection box

2.

Connect the power cables to the power ports in the subrack, as shown in Figure 9-29.
Figure 9-29 Connecting the power cable to the power port

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

3.

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Install the cover of the power cable connection box, as shown in Figure 9-30.
Figure 9-30 Installing the cover of the power cable connection box

Step 11 Insert the boards into the subrack by referring to the records put down in Step 2 and 9.2.4
Installing a board.
Step 12 Install the inter-SCUa or inter-SCUb cables:
l If the new subrack is to be equipped with SCUa boards, install the inter-SCUa cables between
different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-SCUa Cables Between
Different Subracks.
l If the new subrack is to be equipped with SCUb boards, install inter-SCUb SFP+ high-speed
cables between different subracks according to instructions in Installing the Inter-SCUb SFP
+ High-Speed Cables Between Different Subracks.
Step 13 Install the Ethernet cables and fiber optic cables for connecting the interface boards.
Step 14 Turn on the power switch controlling the subrack on the power distribution box.
Step 15 Commission the data loading and services.
For details on the commissioning methods, see BSC6900 UMTS Commissioning Guide.
Step 16 Check whether alarms related to subrack failure such as Cell Setup Failure are cleared after the
BSC6900 subrack is replaced. Clear the alarms by referring to the online alarm reference on the
LMT. If the alarms persist, contact Huawei technical support.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei representative office to dispose the replaced subrack.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.24 Replacing the Independent Fan Subrack


When an independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 is faulty, the independent fan subrack must
be replaced. It takes about 15 minutes to replace an independent fan subrack.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-head
screwdriver, diagonal pliers, dustfree cloth, and a fiber cleaner.

A new independent fan subrack is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 View the label for each port at the rear of the fan subrack, as shown in Figure 9-31. If a label is
not legible, attach a new label to avoid wrong connection after replacing the fan subrack.
Figure 9-31 Rear view of the fan subrack

1 Monitor 1 port for the connection to the power


distribution box

2 Power input port

3 Monitor 2 port (reserved)

4 Monitor 0 port for the connection to the BSC6900 5 Monitor 3 port (reserved)
subrack

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 2 Turn off the power switch that control the independent fan subrack to be replaced.
NOTE

For distribution of the BSC6900 power switches, see the labels on the front panel of the power distribution
box. For details, see 6.1 Distribution of Power Switches.

Step 3 Remove the four screws that fix the independent fan subrack from the front of the cabinet and
reserve them for later use.
Step 4 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the fan subrack, and then pull the fan subrack
for a short distance so that the cables connected to the independent fan subrack can be removed.
Step 5 Remove the cables connected to the independent fan subrack by referring to 10 Replacing a
cable.
Step 6 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the fan subrack, and then remove the
independent fan subrack from the cabinet.
Step 7 Connect monitoring signal cables and PGND cable to the new independent fan subrack.
Step 8 Hold the mounting ears and support the bottom of the new independent fan subrack, and then
push the independent fan subrack slowly into the cabinet along the guide rails.

NOTICE
l Do not push the independent fan subrack completely into the cabinet, that is, certain space
should be reserved for installing cables.
l Pay attention to the mounting bar and guide rails when installing cables.
Step 9 Connect the power cable and monitoring signal cable in sequence of the power distribution box
to the new independent fan subrack.
Step 10 Connect the monitoring signal cable to the monitor 0 port on the new independent fan subrack.
Step 11 Connect the PGND cable to the mounting bar.
Step 12 Push the independent fan subrack completely into the subrack.
Step 13 Fix the screws on the panel of the independent fan subrack.
Step 14 Turn on the power switch that control the independent fan subrack on the power distribution
box.
Step 15 Perform service commissioning.
For detailed procedures, see the BSC6900 UMTS Commissioning Guide.
Step 16 After replacing the independent fan subrack in the BSC6900 cabinet, check whether the alarms
related to the independent fan subrack are cleared. If these alarms persist, clear them by referring
to the alarm online help on the LMT. If these alarms still persist, contact Huawei technical
support.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the replaced independent fan subrack.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

9.25 Replacing the Power Distribution Box


This section describes how to replace a faulty power distribution box. It takes about 25 minutes
to replace a power distribution box.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, cable ties,
diagonal pliers, PVC insulation tapes, and sticky label paper.

A new power distribution box is configured according to actual requirements on site.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

NOTICE
l Replacing the power distribution box in the EPR interrupts all the services carried by the
EPR.
l Replacing the power distribution box in the MPR interrupts all the services carried by the
whole BSC6900.
Figure 9-32 shows the rear panel of the power distribution box.
Figure 9-32 Rear panel of the power distribution box

1 Power input terminals

2 Power output terminals

3 Port connecting the power distribution box and a service subrack

4 2-hole ground screw

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

On the power input terminal block, the installation positions for the -48 V power cables are
labeled 3(-), 2(-), and 1(-), and the installation positions for the RTN power cable are labeled
3(+), 2(+), and 1(+).

The installation positions for the -48 V power cables and RTN power cables are labeled
NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the power output terminal block of the power distribution box.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the state of each switch on the power distribution box. Set all the switches to OFF.
Step 2 Set the switch on the DC PDF controlling the power supply of the cabinet to OFF.

NOTICE
After powering off the cabinet, wait for five minutes, and then perform the replacement.
Step 3 Loosen the screws on the rear transparent plastic filler panel of the power distribution box by
using the M3 Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the plastic filler panel.
Step 4 Remove the cables from the power distribution box. Figure 9-32 shows the cables connected to
the panel of the power distribution box.
l Check the engineering labels on the power input cables, as shown in 1 of Figure 9-32. If the
label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the installation position of the cable.
Then, remove the power cables.
l Check the engineering labels on the power output cables, as shown in 2 of Figure 9-32. If
the label is not legible, attach a temporary label and fill in the installation position of the
cable. Then, remove the power cables.
l Remove the PDB monitoring signal cable, as shown in 3 of .
l Remove the PGND cable that is connected to the busbar of the cabinet from the power
distribution box.
Step 5 Remove the four screws from the hanger of the power distribution box. Keep the removed screws
properly for future use.
Step 6 Remove the screws on the front panel of the power distribution box by using the M3 Phillips
screwdriver. Then, remove the MCBs and filler panels from the power distribution box. Keep
the removed components for future use.
Step 7 Hold the handle of the power distribution box and take it out of the cabinet.
Step 8 Loosen the six screws on the front plastic panel of the new power distribution box by using the
M3 Phillips screwdriver. Then, remove the plastic panel.
Step 9 Install the MCBs in the new power distribution box. Note the installation positions.
Step 10 Install the filler panels at the positions where MCBs are not installed in the new power
distribution box.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 11 Install the plastic panel of the new power distribution box, install the power distribution box on
the top of the cabinet, and then fasten the four screws on the front hanger of the power distribution
box.
Step 12 Connect the cables to the power distribution box.
l Connect the PGND cable to the power distribution box.
l Connect the power input cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary label. Then,
ground screw a new engineering label to the cable.
l Connect the power output cable by referring to the engineering label or temporary label.
Then, ground screw a new engineering label to the cable.
l Connect the PDB monitoring signal cable to one end of the PDB.
Step 13 Ensure that all the power cables are correctly connected.
Step 14 Set the switch that controls the power supply of the power distribution box on the PDF to ON.
Step 15 Set the switches on the power distribution box to ON by referring to the records in Step 1.
Step 16 Install the transparent plastic filler panel at the rear of the power distribution box.
Step 17 After replacing the power distribution box, check the items in Table 9-23.
Table 9-23 Checklist for the new power distribution box
Item

Result

Action

Indicators on the panel


show the normal status of
the power distribution
box. For details about the
indicators, refer to Panel
of the PAMU Board.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

1. Check whether the power input


cables are correctly connected.
If the power input cables are
incorrectly connected,
reconnect the cables.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

Alarms related to the


power distribution box
failure are cleared.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

1. Clear the alarms by referring to


the alarm online help on the
LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

The power distribution


box supplies power to all
the components in the
cabinet.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Yes

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

No further action is required.

207

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Item

Result

Action

No

1. Check whether the power


output cables are correctly
connected. If the power output
cables are incorrectly
connected, turn off all the
switches on the power
distribution box and the switch
that controls the cabinet on the
PDF. Then reconnect the
cables.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

NOTE

After powering on the cabinet, check the power supply to the internal components and handle problems
accordingly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei office to dispose of the faulty power distribution box.

9.26 Replacing a Fan Assembly


This section describes how to replace a faulty fan assembly. You are advised to replace the fan
assembly within one minute.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a Phillips screwdriver, and a flathead screwdriver.

The new fan assembly is clean.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
Replacing the fan assembly severely affects the heat dissipation. You are advised to replace the
fan assembly within one minute. Otherwise, the boards will be damaged due to high temperature.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DIP switch on the PFCU board according to the location and configuration of the fan
assembly.
l If the fan assembly is located in the subrack and the PFCU board is configured, set the DIP
switch on the PFCU board (as shown in Figure 9-33) in the new fan assembly according to
Table 9-24.
Figure 9-33 DIP switch on the PFCU board

Table 9-24 Setting of the DIP switch on the PFCU board


DIP Switch

DIP Bit

Switch Status

Description

SW1

1 (the lowest bit)

OFF

ON

ON

4 (the highest bit)

ON

l If the fan assembly is located in the independent fan subrack and the PFCU board is
configured, set the DIP switch on the PFCU board (as shown in Figure 9-34) in the new fan
assembly according to Table 9-25.
Figure 9-34 DIP switch on the PFCU board

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-25 Setting of the DIP switch on the PFCU board


DIP Switch

DIP Bit

Switch Status

Description

SW1

1 (the lowest bit)

ON

ON

OFF

4 (the highest bit)

ON

Step 2 Loosen the captive screws on the panel of the fan assembly to be replaced.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly. As shown in Figure 9-35, hold the handle of the panel to remove the
fan assembly along the guide rails (all the fans slow down and stop). When the fan assembly is
almost out of the cabinet, hold the bottom of the fan assembly with two hands and remove it.

NOTICE
Do not touch the inside of the fan assembly when replacing the fan assembly. The running fan
or the metal edges of the mechanical parts will injure your fingers.

Figure 9-35 Pulling out the fan assembly

1 Fan Assembly

2 Subrack

Step 4 Reserve the replaced fan assembly in a safe place.


Step 5 Insert the fan assembly into the subrack along the guide rails by holding the bottom of the fan
assembly with one hand and the handle with the other hand. Then, push the fan assembly by
holding the two handles on the fan assembly along the guide rails until the fans start to work.
Step 6 Secure the captive screws on the panel.
Step 7 After replacing the fan assembly, check the items listed in Table 9-26 one by one.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Table 9-26 Checklist for the fan assembly replacement


Item

Expected Result

Operation

Whether the indicators on the


panel show that the fan assembly
is in normal state. For details on
the indicators, see Fan Assembly
(Configured with the PFCU
Board).

Yes

Check the next item.

No

1. Pull the fan assembly


slightly out of the
cabinet, adjust the
position of the fan
assembly, and push the
fan assembly in place.
Check this item again.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei
Customer Service
Center.

Whether the alarms related to the


fan assembly failure are cleared.

Yes

No further action is
required.

No

1. Clear the alarms by


referring to the online
alarm reference on the
LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei
Customer Service
Center.

Step 8 Clean the replaced fan assembly and put it in an ESD box or bag.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei representative office to dispose the replaced fan assembly.

9.27 Replacing a Pluggable Optical Module


This section describes how to replace a faulty pluggable optical module.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, an ESD box or bag, and diagonal
pliers.

A new optical module is ready.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
In short-distance transmission, multimode optical modules are used with the multimode fibers
and the effective transmission distance is 2 km. In long-distance transmission, single-mode
optical module are used with the single-mode fibers and the effective transmission distance can
be 15 km, 40 km, or 80 km. Generally, single-mode optical modules with an effective
transmission distance of 15 km are used. The BSC and its peer equipment must use optical
modules of the same mode and wavelength for effective transmission.
Table 9-27 lists the parameters of the mostly used optical modules.
Table 9-27 Parameters of optical modules

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Optic
al
Modu
le
Type

Pr
oto
col
Ty
pe

Optical
Connecto
r Type

Cent
er
Wav
eleng
th

Ra
te

Trans
missi
on
Dista
nce

Max./Min.
Output
Optical
Power

Satura
tion
Optica
l
Power

Receiv
er
Sensiti
vity

multi
mode
optical
modul
e

ST
M
1

LC/PC

1310
nm

15
5
Mb
it/s

2 km

-14/-19 dBm

-14
dBm

-30
dBm

Single
-mode
optical
modul
e

ST
M
1

LC/PC

1310
nm

15
5
Mb
it/s

15 km

-8/-15 dBm

-8 dBm

-31
dBm

multi
mode
optical
modul
e

GE

LC/PC

850
nm

1.2
5
Gb
it/s

0.5 km

-2.5/-9.5 dBm

0 dBm

-17
dBm

Single
-mode
optical
modul
e

GE

LC/PC

1310
nm

1.2
5
Gb
it/s

10 km

-3/-9 dBm

-3 dBm

-20
dBm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Optic
al
Modu
le
Type

Pr
oto
col
Ty
pe

Optical
Connecto
r Type

Cent
er
Wav
eleng
th

Ra
te

Trans
missi
on
Dista
nce

Max./Min.
Output
Optical
Power

Satura
tion
Optica
l
Power

Receiv
er
Sensiti
vity

multi
mode
optical
modul
e

10
GE

LC/PC

850
nm

10.
31
25
Gb
it/s

0.3 km

-1/-7.3 dBm

-1 dBm

-11.1
dBm

Single
-mode
optical
modul
e

10
GE

LC/PC

1310
nm

10.
31
25
Gb
it/s

10 km

0.5/-8.2 dBm

0.5
dBm

-12.6
dBm

NOTE

l Replacing the pluggable optical module on the standby optical interface board does not affect the
system.
l If there is no standby board in position, replacing the pluggable optical module on the active optical
interface board interrupts all the services carried on the board.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the optical cable on the optical port.
Step 2 Cover the connector of the optical cable with a protective cap to keep it clean.
Step 3 Unlock the bayonet lock, as shown in part 1 of Figure 9-36. Remove the optical module, as
shown in part 2 of Figure 9-36.
Figure 9-36 Replacing an optical module

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Step 4 Cover the optical module with a protective cap.


Step 5 Put the removed optical module in an ESD bag.
Step 6 Insert the new optical module into the socket on the optical interface board. Ensure that the
bayonet lock is secure.
Step 7 Connect the optical cable to the optical port. Ensure that the TX and RX end of the optical cable
are correctly connected. You can hear a click sound when the optical cable is securely connected.
Step 8 Check whether the alarms related to the optical module are cleared.
NOTE

An alarm is reported when the optical module is removed. The alarm is cleared after the optical module is
reinstalled.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Contact the local Huawei representative office to dispose the replaced optical module.

9.28 Replacing an Optical Splitter/Combiner


This section describes how to replace an optical splitter/combiner. The BSC6900 optical
splitters/combiners are LC/LC-LC single-mode optical splitter/combiner and LC/LC-LC
multimode optical splitter/combiner. It takes about five minutes to replace an optical splitter/
combiner.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, dustfree cloth, a fiber cleaner, and
diagonal pliers.

The following materials are ready: cable ties and permanent labels.

A new optical splitter/combiner is ready.

The number and type of optical splitters/combiners to be replaced are specified.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

NOTICE
l When replacing the optical splitter/combiner, do not look into the optical port without eye
protection.
l Replacing an optical splitter/combiner interrupts ongoing services on the corresponding
interface boards. Therefore, replace it during low-traffic hours, for example, at midnight.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new optical splitter/combiner for easy identification. It is
recommended that content of the temporary labels be consistent with the labels on the old optical
splitter/combiner.
Step 2 Deploy the new optical splitter/combiner based on the old optical splitter/combiner.
Step 3 Disconnect the optical fiber by pressing the tab on the optical connector. Then, remove the optical
splitter/combiner to be replaced.
Step 4 Install the new optical splitter/combiner by referring to Installing the Optical Splitter/Combiner.

NOTICE
The TX end and RX end of the new optical splitter/combiner must be correctly connected.
Otherwise, optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new optical splitter/combiner with the engineering labels.
The content of the engineering labels must be identical with that of the temporary labels. For
details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.
Step 6 Bind the optical splitters/combiners.
Step 7 Check the items listed in Table 9-28.
Table 9-28 Checklist for monitoring optical splitter/combiner replacement

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Item

Result

Action

Whether the
connection of the
optical fiber is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the optical fiber and reconnect it.

Whether optical
connectors are
properly inserted
into the related
ports.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the optical connectors.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

9 Replacing Boards and Modules

Item

Result

Action

Whether Alarms
related to
transmission cables
are cleared.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

Clear the alarms by referring to the alarm online


help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced optical splitter/combiner to prevent environmental pollution.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

10

Replacing a cable

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to replace the following cables: power cable, Ethernet cable, fiber
optic cable, clock signal cable, and serial cable to the alarm box, SFP+high-speed cable, trunk
cable and monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box. This section also describes how
to verify the replacement and how to handle the faulty cables.

Context
For details on the requirements of installing the signal cables, see Principles of Installing Signal
Cables.
10.1 Replacing a Power Cable
This describes how to replace a power cable. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a power cable
in overhead mode and about 30 minutes to replace a power cable in underfloor mode.
10.2 Replacing Cabinet PGND Cable
Cabinet PGND cable is classified into overhead cable and underfloor cable according to the
installation position. Replacing the overhead cable takes 10 minutes and replacing the underfloor
cable takes 30 minutes.
10.3 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable
This section describes how to replace an E1/T1 cable of the BSC6900. The cable consists of the
Y-shaped 75-ohm coaxial cable and Y-shaped 120-ohm twisted pair. It takes about 10 minutes
to replace an E1/T1 cable.
10.4 Replacing a Fiber Optic Cable
This section describes how to replace a fiber optic cable. The BSC6900 fiber optic cable includes
the LC/PC-SC/PC single mode fiber optic, LC/PC-SC/PC multimode fiber optic cable, LC/PCFC/PC single mode fiber optic cable, LC/PC-FC/PC multimode fiber optic cable, LC/PC-LC/
PC single mode fiber optic cable, and LC/PC-LC/PC multimode fiber optic cable. It takes about
5 minutes to replace a fiber optic cable.
10.5 Replace an Ethernet Cable
BSC6900 Ethernet cable is classified into the shielded straight-through cable for the OMU/FG2a/
FG2c interface board and the non-shielded straight-through cable for the SCU board. It takes

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

about 5 to 20 minutes to replace an Ethernet cable, depending on the installation position of the
Ethernet cable.
10.6 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable
This section describes how to replace a clock signal cable. Clock signal cables in the
BSC6900 can be divided into the GPS clock signal cable, BITS clock signal cable, and line clock
signal cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace a clock signal cable depending on the installation
position of the reference clock.
10.7 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable
This section describes how to replace a Y-shaped clock cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace
a Y-shaped clock cable, depending on the installation position of the Y-shaped clock cable.
10.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable
This section describes how to replace an RS485 communication cable. Replacing the RS485
communication cable takes about five minutes depending on the position of the environment
monitoring unit (EMU).
10.9 Replacing an Alarm Box Signal Cable
This section describes how to replace an alarm box signal cable. It takes five to twenty minutes
to replace a signal cable depending on the installation position of the alarm box.
10.10 Replacing the PDB Monitoring Signal Cable
This section describes how to replace a PDB monitoring signal cable. It takes about 10 minutes
to replace a monitoring cable.
10.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack
This section describes how to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
It takes about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
10.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable
This section describes how to replace an SFP+ high-speed cable. It takes about 10 minutes to
replace an SFP+ high-speed cable.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

10.1 Replacing a Power Cable


This describes how to replace a power cable. It takes about 10 minutes to replace a power cable
in overhead mode and about 30 minutes to replace a power cable in underfloor mode.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including diagonal pliers, a wrench, a medium-size flat-head
screwdriver, a large-size Phillips screwdriver, and a socket wrench.

The required cable ties are ready.

A new power cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
l During the replacement of the power cable between the PDF and the power distribution box,
if single-input external power is supplied, the replacement causes the system to power off
and interrupts ongoing services. If dual-input external power is supplied, the replacement
does not affect the system but triggers a power failure alarm.
l During the replacement of the power cable between the power distribution box and the
subrack, if single-input power is supplied, the replacement causes the subrack to power off
and interrupts ongoing services carried on the boards in the subrack. If dual-input power is
supplied, the replacement does not affect the system.
l During the replacement of the power cable between the power distribution box and the
independent fan subrack, if single-input power is supplied, the replacement causes the
subrack to power off and affects the system heat dissipation. If dual-input power is supplied,
the replacement does not affect the system.
l Before replacing a power cable, check the power supply mode (for example, single input or
dual input) of the power cable and notify of the customers. For single-input power supply,
be prepared for possible service interruption.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

You can refer to Installing Power Cables and PGND Cables for laying and installing the power
cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the number, length, and type of the 48 V power cable and GND cable to be replaced.
Ensure that the new 48 V cables and GND cables are of proper length and type. Prepare power
cable connectors.
Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of the new 48 V power cable and GND cable.
The content of the temporary labels must be identical with the content of the engineering labels
on the power cables to be replaced.
Step 3 Set switches SW1 through SW6 as listed in Table 10-1.
Table 10-1 Setting switches SW1 to SW6
Power Cable to be
Replaced

External Power Supply


Mode

Operation

Power cable between


the PDF and the power
distribution box

Single input

Record the states of the switches


for power output and turn off all
the switches that are on.

Dual input/double dual inputs

Record the states of the switches


for power output and turn off the
switches that are on and control
the -48 V power cable to be
replaced.

Power cable between


the power distribution
box and the subrack

Single input/dual input

Record the states of the switches


for power output and turn off the
switches that are on and control
the -48 V power cable to be
replaced.

Power cable between


the power distribution
box and the independent
fan subrack

Single input/dual input

Record the states of the switches


for power output and turn off the
switches that are on and control
the -48 V power cable to be
replaced.

Step 4 To replace the power cable between the PDF and the power distribution box, set the switch on
the DC PDF that controls the power supply of the cabinet to OFF, and then disconnect the input
power of the power distribution box. To replace the power cable between the power distribution
box and the subrack/independent fan subrack, skip this step.
Step 5 Remove the original 48 V power cable and GND cable, and lay out the new 48 V power cable
and GND cable.
Step 6 Connect the new 48 V power cable and GND cable to the original ports.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new 48 V power cable and GND cable with the engineering
labels.
The content of the labels on the new 48 V power cable and GND cable must be identical with
the content of the labels on the original 48 V power cable and GND cable. For details, see
Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.
Step 8 Bind the new 48 V power cable and GND cable.
Step 9 Check whether the new 48 V power cable and GND cable are correctly connected, and whether
short-circuit occurs in the new 48 V power cable and GND cable by using a multimeter.
Step 10 Set the switch on the DC PDF controlling the power supply to ON.
Step 11 Set the switches to ON whose original states are ON according to the records in step 3.
Step 12 After replacing the power cable, check the items listed in Table 10-2.
Table 10-2 Checklist for power cable replacement
Item

Expected Result

Operation

Physical connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the power cable and


reconnect it.

The connector of the


power cable is properly
inserted into the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Alarms related to the


power cable are cleared.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

1. Clear the alarms by


referring to the online
alarm reference on the
LMT.
2. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei Customer
Service Center.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose the replaced power cable properly to prevent short-circuits and environment pollution.

10.2 Replacing Cabinet PGND Cable


Cabinet PGND cable is classified into overhead cable and underfloor cable according to the
installation position. Replacing the overhead cable takes 10 minutes and replacing the underfloor
cable takes 30 minutes.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including diagonal pliers, a wrench, a medium-size flat-head
screwdriver, a large-size Phillips screwdriver, and a socket wrench.

The required material is ready, including cable ties or wax strings.

A new cabinet PGND cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
You can refer to Installing Power Cables and PGND Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and diameter of the cabinet PGND cable to be replaced and make
connectors using cabinet PGND cable in proper length.
Step 2 Attach a temporary label to the new cabinet PGND cable for easy identification.
It is recommended that the content on the temporary label be consistent with that on the
engineering label of the cabinet PGND cable to be replaced.
Step 3 Remove the cabinet PGND cable to be replaced and install the new cabinet PGND cable.
Step 4 Connect two ends of the new cabinet PGND cable according to the original position of the
replaced cabinet PGND cable.
Step 5 Remove the temporary label and attach the engineering label of the cabinet PGND cable.
Step 6 Bind the cabinet PGND cable.
Step 7 Ensure that the new cabinet PGND cable is installed correctly.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced cabinet PGND cable properly to prevent short circuit and environmental
pollution.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

10.3 Replacing an E1/T1 Cable


This section describes how to replace an E1/T1 cable of the BSC6900. The cable consists of the
Y-shaped 75-ohm coaxial cable and Y-shaped 120-ohm twisted pair. It takes about 10 minutes
to replace an E1/T1 cable.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, a flat-head screwdriver, and
diagonal pliers.

Required cable ties are ready.

A new E1/T1 cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

NOTICE
l Replacing the E1/T1 cable interrupts the services carried over the E1/T1 cable.
l If the BSC6900 and its peer end are connected using only the E1/T1 cable, all the services
between the BSC6900 and its peer end are interrupted during the replacement.
Lay E1/T1 cables or install E1/T1 cables by referring to Installing the E1/T1 Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the E1/T1 cables to be replaced. Arrange for a new
E1/T1 cable with proper length and type. Note that extra length should be reserved.
Step 2 Add a connector for the DDF to the new E1/T1 cable.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels to the new E1/T1 cable. The content on the temporary label should be
consistent with the content on the original label.
NOTE

To facilitate the routing of E1/T1 cables in real situations, you may have to remove the side doors and rear
door of the cabinet. Install the removed doors after arranging the E1/T1 cables.

Step 4 Lay out the new E1/T1 cable along the original routing, or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Step 5 On the BSC6900 side, remove the fastening screws on both ends of the E1/T1 cable without
using any tools. Then, disconnect the E1/T1 cable to be replaced from the BSC6900 and the
DDF respectively.
Step 6 Connect the new E1/T1 cable without using any tools to the original ports on the BSC6900 and
the DDF.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content on the engineering label of the new E1/T1 cable must be identical with that on the
engineering label of the original E1/T1 cable. For details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels
to the Signal Cables.
Step 8 Bind the new E1/T1 cables.
Step 9 After replacing the E1/T1 cable, check the following item listed in Table 10-3.
Table 10-3 Checklist for E1/T1 cable replacement
Item

Result

Action

Whether cable
connection is correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the E1/T1 cable and


reconnect it.

Whether connectors of
the E1/T1 cable are
properly inserted into
the ports.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Whether alarms related


to transmission cable
are cleared.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

1. Clear the alarms by referring


to the alarm online help on
the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced E1/T1 cable properly to prevent short circuit and environmental
pollution.

10.4 Replacing a Fiber Optic Cable


This section describes how to replace a fiber optic cable. The BSC6900 fiber optic cable includes
the LC/PC-SC/PC single mode fiber optic, LC/PC-SC/PC multimode fiber optic cable, LC/PCFC/PC single mode fiber optic cable, LC/PC-FC/PC multimode fiber optic cable, LC/PC-LC/
PC single mode fiber optic cable, and LC/PC-LC/PC multimode fiber optic cable. It takes about
5 minutes to replace a fiber optic cable.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, dustfree cloth, a fiber cleaner, and
diagonal pliers.

The required cable ties are ready.

A new fiber optic cable is ready.

The number, length, and type of the fiber optic cables to be replaced are determined.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

NOTICE
l Do not look directly at connectors of the fiber optic cables when replacing the fiber optic
cable. The beam may hurt your eyes.
l When the BSC6900 and other NEs are connected in optical port backup mode, replacing one
fiber optic cable does not affect system services. However, the replacement interrupts all the
services carried on this cable in other connection mode.
l When the BSC6900 and its peer equipment are connected using only the fiber optic cable,
replacing this cable interrupts all the services between the BSC6900 and its peer NEs.
For details on how to lay and install the fiber optic cables, see Installing the Optical Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that the
content of the temporary labels be identical with that of the original labels.
Step 2 Lay the fiber optic cable according to the original route or a new route based on the onsite
changes.
Step 3 Disconnect the fiber optic cable to be replaced.
If...

Then...

The connector type is LC/PC or SC/PC Press the tab on the connector and pull the cable
out.
The type of the connector is FC/PC

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Unscrew the optical connector counterclockwise.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable
NOTE

If the removed fiber optic cable is not damaged, cover the connectors with dust-proof caps. If the connectors
are dirty, clean them with the dustfree cloth or the fiber cleaner.

Step 4 Remove the protective caps from the fiber optic cable connectors of the new fiber optic cable
and reserve them for later use. Connect the new fiber optic cable to the original ports.

NOTICE
For the LC/PC, SC/PC or FC/PC connector, the TX end and the RX end must be connected
correctly by referring to the temporary labels. Otherwise, the signals cannot be received or
transmitted.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new fiber optic cable with the engineering labels. The
content of the labels on the new fiber optic cable must be identical with that of the labels on the
original fiber optic cable. For details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.
Step 6 Bind the new fiber optic cable.
Step 7 Check the items as listed in Table 10-4 in sequence.
Table 10-4 Checklist for fiber optic cable replacement
Expected
Result

Operation

Physical connection
is correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the fiber optic cable and reconnect it.

The connector of the


fiber optic cable is
properly inserted
into the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the insertion.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

Clear the alarms by referring to the online alarm


reference on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei technical support.

Item

Alarms related to
transmission cables
are cleared.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose the replaced fiber optic cables properly to prevent environmental pollution.

10.5 Replace an Ethernet Cable


BSC6900 Ethernet cable is classified into the shielded straight-through cable for the OMU/FG2a/
FG2c interface board and the non-shielded straight-through cable for the SCU board. It takes
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

about 5 to 20 minutes to replace an Ethernet cable, depending on the installation position of the
Ethernet cable.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, an Ethernet cable tester, an RJ45
crimping tool, and diagonal pliers.

The required cable ties are ready.

A new Ethernet cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

NOTICE
l Replacing the Ethernet cable connected to the LMT interrupts the communication between
the LMT and the OMU.
l The Port Trunking function is used in the interconnection ports on the inter-subrack SCUa
board. Replacing one Ethernet cable does not affect the system.
l For the interface board, if the BSC6900 is connected to the peer equipment only through the
Ethernet cable, replacing this cable interrupts all the services between the BSC6900 and its
peer NEs.
l The OMUa/OMUc board is equipped with a pair of Ethernet cables for backup. Replacing
one of them does not affect the system.
l

Confirm the number, length, and type of the Ethernet cables to be replaced. Ethernet cables
from different manufacturers differ in type, color, and diameter. Ensure that the new
Ethernet cable is compatible with the cable to be replaced.

You can refer to Installing the Ethernet Cables for laying and installing the Ethernet cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Arrange for a new Ethernet cable with proper length and type. Note that extra length should be
reserved.
Step 2 Assemble the shielded RJ45 connector or the unshielded RJ45 connector and the Ethernet cable
according to the actual requirements by referring to Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector
and the Ethernet Cable or Assembling the Unshielded RJ45 Connector and the Ethernet
Cable, and then check the appearance of metal contact strips and test the connection of assembled
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

cables by referring to Checking the Appearance of Metal Contact Strips and Testing the
Connection of Assembled Cables.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification.
It is recommended that the content of the temporary labels be identical with that of the original
labels.
Step 4 Lay the Ethernet cable according to the original route or a new route based on the onsite changes.
Step 5 Disconnect the Ethernet cable to be replaced from the ports.
Step 6 Connect the new Ethernet cable to the original ports.
Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content of the labels on the new Ethernet cable must be identical with that of the labels on
the original Ethernet cable. For details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal
Cables.
Step 8 Bind the new Ethernet cable.
Step 9 Check the items as listed in Table 10-5 in sequence.
Table 10-5 Checklist for Ethernet cable replacement
Expected
Result

Operation

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the cable and reconnect it.

The connectors of the


cable are properly
inserted into the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the insertion.

Alarms related to
network
communications are
cleared.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Clear the alarms by referring to the online alarm


reference on the LMT. If the alarms persist,
contact Huawei technical support.

Check whether two


ends connected by the
cable can properly
communicate with
each other after the
Ping command is
executed in DOS
mode.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable


is faulty, replace it with a new one.

Item

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose the replaced Ethernet cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

10.6 Replacing a Clock Signal Cable


This section describes how to replace a clock signal cable. Clock signal cables in the
BSC6900 can be divided into the GPS clock signal cable, BITS clock signal cable, and line clock
signal cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace a clock signal cable depending on the installation
position of the reference clock.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap and diagonal pliers.

Required cable ties or wax strings are ready.

A new clock signal cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
Lay clock signal cables or install clock signal cables by referring to Installing the Clock Signal
Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the new clock signal cable according to the original routing or according to the new
routing requirements on site.
Step 3 Disconnect the clock signal cable from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new clock signal cable to the original ports.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For
details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.
Step 6 Bind the new clock signal cables.
Step 7 After replacing the clock signal cable, check the items in Table 10-6.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Table 10-6 Checklist for clock signal cable replacement


Item

Result

Action

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the cable and reconnect it.

The connectors of the


clock signal cable are
properly inserted into
the ports.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

Clear the alarms by referring to the alarm online


help on the LMT. If the faults persist, contact
Huawei technical support.

Alarms related to the


clock signal cable are
cleared.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced clock signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.

10.7 Replacing a Y-Shaped Clock Cable


This section describes how to replace a Y-shaped clock cable. It takes 5 to 20 minutes to replace
a Y-shaped clock cable, depending on the installation position of the Y-shaped clock cable.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap and diagonal pliers.

The required cable ties are ready.

A new Y-shaped clock cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

NOTICE
Replacing a Y-shaped clock cable may cause a clock-related alarm and an automatic switchover
between the active and standby SCUb or SCUc boards.
You can refer to Installing the Y-Shaped Clock Cables for laying and installing Y-shaped clock
cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the number, length, and type of the Y-shaped clock cables to be replaced. Attach
temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that the content on
the temporary label be consistent with that on the engineering label of the Y-shaped clock cable
to be replaced.
Step 2 Confirm that the SCUb or SCUc board on which the Y-shaped clock cable to be replaced works
in standby mode. If the SCUb or SCUc works in active mode, perform active/standby switchover
on the SCUb or SCUc boards.
Step 3 Disconnect the Y-shaped clock cable from the ports.
Step 4 Lay the new Y-shaped clock cable according to the original route or a new route based on the
onsite changes.
Step 5 Connect the new Y-shaped clock cable to the original ports.
Step 6 Replace the temporary labels on the new Y-shaped clock cable with the engineering labels.
The content of the labels on the new Y-shaped clock cable must be identical with that of the
labels on the original Y-shaped clock cable. For details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels
to the Signal Cables.
Step 7 Bind the new Y-shaped clock cable.
Step 8 After replacing the Y-shaped clock cable, check the items as listed in Table 10-7.
Table 10-7 Checklist for Y-shaped clock cable replacement

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Item

Expected Result

Operation

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the Y-shaped clock cable


and reconnect it.

The connectors of the Yshaped clock cable are


properly inserted into the
port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the insertion.

Alarms related to the


clock cable are cleared.

Yes

No further action is required.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Item

Expected Result

Operation

No

1. Clear the alarms by referring to


the online alarm reference on the
LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei Customer Service
Center.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose the replaced Y-shaped clock cable properly to prevent short-circuits and environment
pollution.

10.8 Replacing an EMU RS485 Communication Cable


This section describes how to replace an RS485 communication cable. Replacing the RS485
communication cable takes about five minutes depending on the position of the environment
monitoring unit (EMU).

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including tool gloves or ESD gloves, diagonal pliers, and a headflat screwdriver.

The required cable ties are ready.

A new RS485 communication cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.
You can install EMU RS485 cables by referring to Installing the EMU RS485 Communication
Cables.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Procedure
Step 1 Lay a new RS485 cable according to the original route or a new route based on the onsite changes.
Step 2 On the EMU side, disconnect the DB9 male connector on one end of the EMU RS485
communication cable from the DB9 female socket on the EMU.
Step 3 On the BSC6900 cabinet side, disconnect the RJ45 connector on the other end of the EMU
RS485 communication cable from the J1 port on the power distribution box of the BSC6900
cabinet.
Step 4 Connect the new RS485 communication cable to the EMU and the power distribution box
according to the original route.
Step 5 Attach engineering labels to both ends of the new RS485 communication cable. For details, refer
to Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.
The content of the engineering labels on the new RS485 communication cable must be identical
with that of the engineering labels on the original RS485 communication cable.
Step 6 Power on the EMU.
Step 7 Test the EMU by referring to the manual delivered with the EMU.
Step 8 Observe the indicator on the EMU panel to check whether the communication cable connection
is correct. If not, check the connection of connectors.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose the replaced RS485 communication cable to prevent environment pollution.

10.9 Replacing an Alarm Box Signal Cable


This section describes how to replace an alarm box signal cable. It takes five to twenty minutes
to replace a signal cable depending on the installation position of the alarm box.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including ESD gloves, an ESD wrist strap, and diagonal pliers.

The required cable ties are ready.

A new signal cable is ready.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Context

NOTICE
l To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD
wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD
connector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,
wear ESD gloves.
l It is recommended that you need to use the same board type to replace the old board. To use
a board of the different version to replace the board (for example, use a board of version a
to replace a board of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

NOTICE
Communication between the alarm box and the LMT PC is interrupted during the replacement.

Procedure
Step 1 Lay out the new signal cable according to the original routing or according to the new routing
requirements on site.
Step 2 Loosen the DB9/DB25 connector and then remove the signal cable from the LMT that reports
alarms.
Step 3 On the alarm box side, power off the alarm box, unlock the alarm box, remove the front panel,
and then disconnect the signal cable.
Step 4 Connect the new signal cable to the LMT PC and the alarm box by referring to the original
connection of the signal cable.
Step 5 Reinstall the front panel and lock the alarm box.
Step 6 Attach engineering labels to the new signal cable. The content of the new label must be the same
as the content of the old one.
Step 7 Power on the alarm box.
Step 8 Test the alarm box by referring to the manual delivered with the alarm box.
Step 9 Observe indicators on the front panel of the alarm box. If the indicators on the front panel of the
alarm box indicate abnormal communication on the serial port, check the connection.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

10.10 Replacing the PDB Monitoring Signal Cable


This section describes how to replace a PDB monitoring signal cable. It takes about 10 minutes
to replace a monitoring cable.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, diagonal pliers, and a Phillips
screwdriver.

The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

A new monitoring cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the monitoring cable.
Step 3 Remove the monitoring cable to be replaced from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new monitoring cable to the original ports.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For
details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.
Step 6 Bind the monitoring cable.
Step 7 After replacing the monitoring cable of the power distribution box, check the items in Table
10-8.
Table 10-8 Checklist for monitoring cable replacement
Item
Cable connection is
correct.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Result

Action

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the monitoring cable and connect the


cable again.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Item

Result

Action

The connectors of the


monitoring cable are
properly inserted into
the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Indicators on the panel


properly indicate the
running of power
distribution box.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Contact Huawei for technical support.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

Clear the alarms by referring to the alarm online


help on the LMT. If the faults persist, contact
Huawei technical support.

Alarms related to the


monitoring cable are
cleared.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced monitoring cable to prevent environmental pollution.

10.11 Replacing the Monitoring Signal Cable for the


Independent Fan Subrack
This section describes how to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
It takes about 10 minutes to replace a monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, diagonal pliers, and a Phillips
screwdriver.

The materials are ready. The materials are cable ties or wax strings.

A new monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

Procedure
Step 1 Attach temporary labels to the new cable for easy identification. It is recommended that content
of the temporary label be consistent with that of the old label.
Step 2 Lay out the new monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Step 3 Disconnect the monitoring signal cable to be replaced from the port.
Step 4 Connect the new monitoring signal cable to the corresponding port.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels on the new cable with the engineering labels.
The content of the engineering label must be consistent with that of the temporary label. For
details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.
Step 6 Bind the monitoring signal cable to other cables.
Step 7 After replacing the monitoring signal cable, check the items in Table 10-9.
Table 10-9 Checklist for monitoring signal cable replacement
Item

Result

Action

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Remove the monitoring signal cable and connect


the cable again.

The connectors of the


monitoring signal cable
are securely connected
to the ports.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Secure the connectors of the monitoring signal


cable.

The indicators on the


panel of the
independent fan
subrack correctly
indicate the state of the
fan box.

Yes

Go to the next item.

No

Contact Huawei for technical support.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

Clear the alarms by referring to the alarm online


help on the LMT. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei technical support.

Cable connection is
correct.

Alarms related to the


monitoring signal cable
are cleared.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced monitoring signal cable properly to prevent environmental pollution.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

10.12 Replacing an SFP+ High-Speed Cable


This section describes how to replace an SFP+ high-speed cable. It takes about 10 minutes to
replace an SFP+ high-speed cable.

Prerequisites
l

Required tools are ready, including an ESD wrist strap, an ESD box or bag, and diagonal
pliers.

A new SFP+ high-speed cable is ready.

Context

NOTICE
To protect the components from electrostatic discharge, wear an ESD wrist strap properly.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESD connector on the cabinet. If
no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available, wear ESD gloves.
For details on how to install SFP+ high-speed cables, see Installing the Inter-SCUb SFP+ HighSpeed Cables Between Different Subracks.

Procedure
Step 1 Confirm the quantity, length, and type of the SFP+ high-speed cables to be replaced. Attach
temporary label to the new cable for easy identification. The content on the temporary label
should be consistent with that on the engineering label of the SFP+ high-speed cable to be
replaced.
Step 2 Confirm that the SCUb whose SFP+ high-speed cable is to be replaced works in standby mode.
If the SCUb works in active mode, perform active/standby switchover on the SCUb boards.
Step 3 Pull out the connector of the SFP+ high-speed cable to be replaced from where it is inserted by
the handle, as shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 SFP+ High-Speed Cable

Step 4 Lay out the new SFP+ high-speed cable according to the original routing.
Step 5 Connect the new SFP+ high-speed cable to the corresponding ports.
Step 6 Replace the temporary label on the new SFP+ high-speed cable with the engineering label.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

10 Replacing a cable

The content on the engineering label must be consistent with that on the engineering label of the
original SFP+ high-speed cable. For details, see Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal
Cables.
Step 7 Bind the new SFP+ high-speed cable.
Step 8 After replacing the SFP+ high-speed cable, check the items listed in Table 10-10.
Table 10-10 Checklist for SFP+ high-speed cable replacement
Item

Result

Action

Cable connection is
correct.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Remove the SFP+ high-speed


cable and reconnect it.

The connector of the


SFP+ high-speed cable
is properly inserted
into the port.

Yes

Check the next item.

No

Secure the connector.

Alarms related to
transmission cables are
cleared.

Yes

No further action is required.

No

1. Clear the alarms by referring


to the alarm online help on
the LMT.
2. If the alarms persist, contact
Huawei technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Dispose of the replaced SFP+ high-speed cable properly to prevent short circuit and
environmental pollution.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

11

Appendix

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to check the appearance of metal contact strips, test the connection
of assembled network cables, assemble the shielded RJ45 connector or the unshielded RJ45
connector and the network cable, and use the BSC6900site maintenance record form.
11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap
To protect equipment against the damage caused by ESD, when performing operations on the
equipment, use the ESD wrist strap besides grounding the equipment properly.
11.2 Checking the Appearance of Metal Contact Strips
This section describes how to check the appearance of the metal contact strips and check whether
an RJ45 connector is eligible.
11.3 Testing the Connection of Assembled Ethernet Cables
This section describes how to test an Ethernet Cable product, such as whether connectors at two
ends are conducted properly and whether the connection is correct. A straight-through cable is
used as an example in this section.
11.4 Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and the Ethernet Cable
This section describes how to assemble the shielded RJ45 connector and the straight-through
cable.
11.5 Assembling the Unshielded RJ45 Connector and the Ethernet Cable
This section describes how to assemble the unshielded RJ45 connector and the straight-through
cable.
11.6 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form
The BSC6900 site maintenance record form is used to record site maintenance operations,
including replacement, capacity expansion, and routine cleaning.
11.7 Principles of Installing the Signal Cables
This section describes principles of installing signal cables. The principles involve minimum
bending radius, cable layout, cable routing, and cable binding.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

11.1 Wearing an ESD Wrist Strap


To protect equipment against the damage caused by ESD, when performing operations on the
equipment, use the ESD wrist strap besides grounding the equipment properly.

Context
l

Ensure that the metal button of the ESD wrist strap is wrapped tightly against your wrist,
and the other end of the strap (ESD jack) is inserted into the ESD socket as shown in Figure
11-1.

Set the multimeter to the resistance scale to measure the resistance of the ESD wrist strap
as shown in Figure 11-2. Ensure that the resistance is between 0.8 megohm and 1.2
megohm. The service life of the ESD wrist strap is two years in general. When the resistance
of the ESD wrist strap fails to meet the requirements, replace it with a new one.

An ESD wrist strap cannot protect the board from the ESD when the board is in contact
with the clothes. Therefore, avoid contact between the board and clothes.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap properly.
Step 2 Insert the connector of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD socket on the cabinet, as shown in
Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1 ESD socket

2 ESD jack

3 ESD wrist strap

NOTE

The connector of the ESD wrist strap can be inserted into either socket labeled with the ESD sign, as shown
in part A or part B of Figure 11-1.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Figure 11-2 Measuring the resistance of an ESD wrist strap

----End

11.2 Checking the Appearance of Metal Contact Strips


This section describes how to check the appearance of the metal contact strips and check whether
an RJ45 connector is eligible.

Context
l

The metal contact strips must be of the same height and be of the standard size to ensure
the reliable contact with the core of the cable.

The horizontal surface of the metal contact strips must be the same, with a maximum
deviation of 5. Each metal contact strip must be parallel to the surface of the connector.

The surface of the metal contact strips must be free from foreign objects, dirt, or rust.
Otherwise, the continuity will be affected.

The contact between the strips and the connector must be reliable. The arrangement of the
plastic separation strips on the connector must be neat, even and be free from tilting or
damage.

The end of the cable core must reach the blade of the metal contact strips. The end of the
cable core must reach the surface of the connector trough as close as possible. The space
in between must be less than 0.5 mm.

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the connector and check whether the height of each metal contact strip is 6.020.13 mm.
If the measuring tools are unavailable, you are advised to check the connector by comparing it
with an eligible connector. Figure 11-3 shows an unqualified connector. Figure 11-4 shows an
eligible connector.
NOTE

If the assembled connector is unqualified, redo the work until an eligible connector is made.

Figure 11-3 Metal contact strips of different heights

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Figure 11-4 Metal contact strips of the same height

Step 2 Hold connector with an angle of 45 and check the horizontal surface of the metal contact strips.
Figure 11-5 shows an unqualified connector.
Figure 11-5 Metal contact strips of different heights and uneven horizontal surface

Step 3 Hold the connector and check whether there are any foreign objects, dirt, or rust on the metal
contact strips. If yes, clean the connector. If the foreign objects, dirt, or rust is irremovable, redo
the connector. Figure 11-6 shows an unqualified connector.
Figure 11-6 Foreign objects on the surface of the metal contact strips

Step 4 Hold the connector and check whether the metal contact strips and the plastic separation strips
are tilting or damaged. If yes, straighten the strips. If the strips fail to be straightened, redo the
connector. Figure 11-7 shows an unqualified connector.
Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Figure 11-7 Tilting plastic separation strips of the connector

Step 5 Hold the connector and check whether the cable core is visible. The end of the cable core must
reach the blade of the metal contact strips and is reliably connected with the metal contact strips.
If not, redo the connector. Figure 11-8 shows an unqualified connector.
Figure 11-8 Connector with invisible cable core

----End

11.3 Testing the Connection of Assembled Ethernet Cables


This section describes how to test an Ethernet Cable product, such as whether connectors at two
ends are conducted properly and whether the connection is correct. A straight-through cable is
used as an example in this section.

Context
There are two common types of Ethernet cables, namely straight-through cable and crossover
cable.
l

The straight-through cable is used between the Ethernet adapter and Ethernet switch
(including the hub). Table 11-1 lists the one-on-one pin mapping of the cable.
Table 11-1 Pin mapping of the straight-through cable

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Connector 1

Connector 2

Color of the cable


core

Twisted or not

Orange

Twisted

Orange and white

Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted
244

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Connector 1

Connector 2

Color of the cable


core

Green and white

Blue

Blue and white

Brown

Brown and white

Twisted or not

Twisted

Twisted

The crossover cable is used between the Ethernet adapter and Ethernet switch (including
the hub). Table 11-2 lists the crossover mapping of the cable.
Table 11-2 Pin mapping of the crossover cable
Connector 1

Connector 2

Color of the cable


core

Twisted or not

Orange

Twisted

Orange-white

Green

Green and white

Blue

Blue and white

Brown

Brown and white

Twisted

Twisted

Twisted

Figure 11-9 shows the numbering sequence of the pins.


Figure 11-9 Numbering sequence of the pins

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the two ends of the assembled Ethernet cable into the RJ45 ports of the cable tester
respectively.
Step 2 Turn on the tester. If the indicators 1-8-G on both the MASTER device and the REMOTE device
are ON in succession, you can infer that the Ethernet cable is functional.
NOTE

Set the switch to S to slow down the lighting speed of the indicators for easy observation, as shown in
Figure 11-10.

Figure 11-10 Testing the Ethernet cable

Step 3 Swing the cable and the tester gently and repeat Step 2 to ensure the continuity reliability of the
Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure 11-11.
Figure 11-11 Verifying the reliability of the Ethernet cable

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

The test procedure for the crossover cable is the same as that for the straight-through cable.
However, the lighting sequence of the indicators is different.
The lighting sequence of the indicators in the test of a crossover cable is as follows.
Indicators on the MASTER device: 1-8-G; indicators on the REMOTE device: 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8G.
If the indicators are not on in the previous sequence or certain indicators are not on, the Ethernet
cable is ineligible.
NOTE

If the cable tester is unavailable, you are advised to use a multimeter to test the continuity of the Ethernet
cable, as shown in Figure 11-12.

Figure 11-12 Testing the continuity of the Ethernet cable

----End

11.4 Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and the


Ethernet Cable
This section describes how to assemble the shielded RJ45 connector and the straight-through
cable.

Context
Figure 11-13 shows the structure of the shielded RJ45 connector and the straight-through cable.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Figure 11-13 Shielded RJ45 connector

A Jacket of the connector

B Metal jacket

C Frame

D Connector

E Jacket of the Ethernet cable

F shield layer

G Twisted pair

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the Ethernet cable through A, as shown in Figure 11-14.
Figure 11-14 Inserting the Ethernet cable through the connector jacket

Step 2 Strip E for 30 mm and cut off the nylon layer inside the jacket. Cut E for about 5 mm, as shown
in Figure 11-15.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

NOTICE
l Be cautious not to damage the shield layer when stripping the jacket.
l Be cautious not to damage the insulation layer of the twisted pair when stripping the shield
layer.

Figure 11-15 Stripping the jacket of the twisted pair (unit: mm)

Step 3 Place B through the twisted pair to cover F, as shown in Figure 11-16.
Figure 11-16 Placing the metal jacket

Step 4 Insert the metal jacket into the jacket of the twisted pair. Cut the shield layer and the aluminum
foil along the edge of the metal jacket to expose G of about 20 mm, as shown in Figure 11-17.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Figure 11-17 Stripping the shield layer (unit: mm)

Step 5 Insert the four twisted pairs of different colors into C, as shown in Figure 11-18 and Figure
11-19.
Figure 11-18 Inserting the twisted pairs into the frame

Figure 11-19 Arrangement of the twisted pairs in different colors

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Step 6 Place G on C according to the arrangement shown in Figure 11-20. Figure 11-21 and Table
11-3 show the mapping between the twisted pairs and the pins.
Figure 11-20 Placing the four twisted pairs on the frame

Figure 11-21 Mapping between the twisted pairs and the pins

Table 11-3 Mapping between the twisted pairs and the pins

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Pin

Color of the cable

Brown

White and brown

Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Pin

Color of the cable

White and blue

Blue

White and green

Orange

White and orange

Step 7 Cut the excessive part of the cables along the side of the frame, as shown in Figure 11-22.
Figure 11-22 Cutting the excessive part of the twisted pairs

Step 8 Insert the frame into D and turn the metal shielding jacket at an angle of 90 to facilitate the
movement, as shown in Figure 11-23.
NOTE

Ensure that the frame is completely inserted into D.

Figure 11-23 Inserting the frame into the connector

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Step 9 Move B towards the connector to cover the connector and the frame completely. Crimp the
connector by using the crimping tool, as shown in Figure 11-24.
Figure 11-24 Crimping the connector

Step 10 Move A towards the connector to cover the metal jacket. One end of the RJ45 connector is
assembled, as shown in Figure 11-25.
Figure 11-25 Covering the connector with the jacket

Step 11 Repeat Step 1 through Step 10 to assemble the RJ45 connector at the other end.
----End

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

11.5 Assembling the Unshielded RJ45 Connector and the


Ethernet Cable
This section describes how to assemble the unshielded RJ45 connector and the straight-through
cable.

Context
Figure 11-26 shows the structure of the unshielded RJ45 connector and the straight-through
cable.
Figure 11-26 Unshielded RJ45 connector

B Jacket

A Connector

C Twisted pairs

Procedure
Step 1 Strip the twisted pair by 16 mm, as shown in Figure 11-27.

NOTICE
Be cautious not to damage the insulation layer of the twisted pair when stripping the shield layer.
Figure 11-27 Stripping the twisted pair (unit: mm)

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Step 2 Arrange the twisted pairs according to Figure 11-28 and cut the excessive part. Table 11-4 lists
the mapping between the twisted pairs and the pins.
Figure 11-28 Mapping between the twisted pairs and the pins (unit: mm)

Table 11-4 Mapping between the twisted pairs and the pins
Pin

Color of the cable

Brown

White and brown

Green

White and blue

Blue

White and green

Orange

White and orange

Step 3 Insert the arranged cables into the connector. Crimp the connector by using the crimping tool,
as shown in Figure 11-29.
NOTE

Ensure that the cables are completely inserted into the connector.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Figure 11-29 Crimping the connector

Step 4 Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 to assemble the RJ45 connector at the other end.
----End

11.6 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form


The BSC6900 site maintenance record form is used to record site maintenance operations,
including replacement, capacity expansion, and routine cleaning.
Table 11-5 BSC6900 Site Maintenance Record Form
Site name:

Maintenance date:

Time of occurrence:

Time of fixing:

Person on duty:

Operator:

Maintenance type:

Replacing a board

Replacing a cable

Replacing a
subrack or fan
assembly, power
distribution box

Routine cleaning

Expanding the
subrack capacity

Others

Detailed maintenance
operations:
Final commissioning
results:

11.7 Principles of Installing the Signal Cables


This section describes principles of installing signal cables. The principles involve minimum
bending radius, cable layout, cable routing, and cable binding.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Principles of Installing Signal Cables


When installing signal cables, take the following precautions:
l

Optical cables should not be stretched roughly or stepped on, and heavy objects should not
be placed on the cable to avoid damage.

Optical connectors not in use must be covered with a dustproof cap.

If connectors of signal cables are made before delivery, pack the connectors with soft and
durable materials such as a packing bag during cabling.

Protect jackets of signal cables from being damaged during the routing.

When coiling the extra length of optical cables on the fiber management tray, apply proper
force to avoid damaging the optical.

The actual installation positions must meet the requirements of site survey and data
configuration.

When installing the signal cables, you should route the extra length of the interconnection
cables on both sides of the cabinet according to the requirement for the bending radius of
the cables.

The related operation guide is intended for only the installation method. The actual
installation position of cables should meet the requirements of site survey and should be
consistent with the data configuration scheme.

Minimum Bending Radius


The bending radius of the signal cable meets the requirements of all types of cables. Table
11-6 lists the bending radius of the signal cables.
Table 11-6 Requirements for the bending radius
Wire

Bending Radius

BITS clock signal cable

Not less than 45 mm

Y-shaped clock cable

Not less than 25 mm

Ethernet cable

Not less than 25 mm

Optical cable

Not less than 40 mm

SFP+ high-speed cable

Not less than 40 mm

E1/T1 cable

Not less than 40 mm

EMU RS485 Communication Cable

Not less than 25 mm

OMUc serial cable

Not less than 25 mm

NOTE
The port does not require a signal cable
or connection to other devices when the
system runs properly. Therefore,
equipment security is not affected.

Signal cable of the alarm box

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Not less than 25 mm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Principles of Routing the Signal Cables


To facilitate maintenance and capacity expansion, follow these principles when routing cables.
The layout sequence in overhead and underfloor cabling modes must be the same.
l

The cables can be routed either on the front side first or on the rear side first. The cables
meant for the front of the cabinet must be laid only in the front side of the cabinet. Follow
the same principle for the cables meant for the rear of the cabinet.

whereas routing the cables at the back of the cabinet, you should route the E1/T1 cables
before routing the optical cables.

Requirements of Routing the Signal Cables


The requirements for routing signal cables are as follows:
l

Protect the jackets of the signal cables from being damaged during the routing.

Hold the connector when plugging out the signal cables to protect the signal cable from
damage.

When installing the signal cables, you should route the extra length of the interconnection
cables on both sides of the cabinet according to the requirement for the bending radius of
the cables.

For combined cabinets, the extra signal cable in front of the cabinet should be routed along
the cable ladder or at one side of the cabinet. It should not be placed in the gap between the
combined cabinets.

The signal cables must be separated from the power cables.

The bending radius of the signal cable satisfies the requirements of all kinds of cables.
Table 11-6 lists the bending radius of the signal cables.

Extra length of the signal cable should be reserved near the connector.

The signal cables must be neatly laid in the rack, according to the engineering design.

If the height difference between the cable tray and the top of the cabinet exceeds 800 mm,
a vertical cable ladder must be used. The signal cables and the lower part of the downward
cable ladder must be bound together.

The routing should be in accordance with the engineering design.

The cabling is clear, proper, and smooth at the bends. The cables are laid in parallel.

The signal cables layout facilitates maintenance and future expansion.

Requirements of Binding the Signal Cables


The requirements of binding the signal cables are as follows:
l

The signal cables and power cables must be bound separately. The spacing between cable
ties must be at least 150 mm.

The twine for binding the cables must be coated with wax.

The signal cables must be bound at the entrance and exit of the cable trough and at the
turning points, as shown in Figure 11-30.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

11 Appendix

Figure 11-30 Bending and binding signal cables

The optical cables must be neatly bound in pairs.

The cables on the cable tray must be bound neatly.

The cable ties must face the same direction and be tied with proper tightness.

The cable ties must be placed at regular intervals, 200 mm for E1/T1 cables , and 150 mm
for optical cables.

The extra length of the cable ties must be cut and the cut surface must be smooth.

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

12 Indicators on Components

12

Indicators on Components

This chapter describes the indicators on the BSC6900 components.


Indicators

Description

DPU

DPUb board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the DPUb Board

DPUe board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the DPUe Board

GCUa/GCGa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


a GCUa/GCGa Board

GCUb/GCGb board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


a GCUb/GCGb Board

AEUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the AEUa Board

AOUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the AOUa Board

AOUc board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the AOUc Board

FG2a board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the FG2a Board

FG2c board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


an FG2c Board

GOUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the GOUa Board

GOUc/GOUe board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


a GOUc/GOUe Board

GOUd board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionOIUa


Board

GCU/
GCG

INT

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

12 Indicators on Components

Indicators
PEUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the PEUa Board

PEUc board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the PEUc Board

POUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the POUa Board

POUc board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the POUc Board

UOIa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the UOIa Board

UOIc board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the UOIc Board

NIU

NIUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the NIUa Board

OMU

OMUa and OMUb


board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


an OMUa Board

OMUc board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


an OMUc Board

SAUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the SAUa Board

SAUc board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the SAUc Board

ASU

ASUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the ASUa Board

SPU

SPUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the SPUa Board

SPUb/SPUc board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the SPUb/SPUc Board

SCUa board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the SCUa Board

SCUb board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the SCUb Board

MDMC board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the MDMC Board

PAMU board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionPanel of


the PAMU Board

SAU

SCU

Assista
nt
Board

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

BSC6900 UMTS
Site Maintenance Guide

13 DIP Switches on Components

13

DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on boards and subracks of theBSC6900.
Table 13-1 DIP Switches on BSC Components

Issue 01 (2015-03-25)

DIP Switches on
BSC Components

Description

DIP Switch on a
Subrack

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switch on a


Subrack

DIP Switch on the


AEUa Board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switches on


the AEUa Board

DIP Switch on the


AOUa Board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switches on


the AOUa Board

DIP Switch on the


MDMC Board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switch on the


MDMC Board

DIP Switch on the


PAMU Board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switch on the


PAMU Board

DIP Switch on the


PEUa Board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switches on


the PEUa Board

DIP Switch on the


PEUc Board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switches on


the PEUc Board

DIP Switch on the


PFCU Board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switch on the


PFCU Board

DIP Switch on the


POUa Board

For details, see BSC6900 Hardware DescriptionDIP Switches on


the POUa Board

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

Você também pode gostar